JP7080808B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) that is configured to change the state of the machine, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the game state is set to the predetermined game value by the player. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for the player who can easily win the ball, or becomes advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left middle right symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop or shake in a state of matching with a specific display result. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, for example, Patent Document 1 describes that a sub-control unit stores error history data and displays it on a liquid crystal display unit. It is also stated that the types of stored errors include power off.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-153681

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the power is stored as off without distinguishing between when the entire gaming machine is restarted and when only the sub-control unit is restarted, the power is turned on. The situation cannot be determined appropriately, and there is a possibility that the processing is not optimally executed, such as unnecessary processing being executed.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing optimum processing according to a situation.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is controlled by receiving power supply from a power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and a power supply means. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) and the power supply means to receive power and store predetermined information regarding activation based on the instruction information from the first control means. The second control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) and the power supply supplied to the second control means are monitored, and the power supply voltage of the power source is less than a predetermined value. A monitoring means that outputs a predetermined signal to the second control means at a certain time (for example, the power supply supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b is monitored, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V), the first 2 The power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply cutoff signal to the effect control CPU 012IW120b is provided, and the second control means is activated differently depending on whether or not a predetermined signal is output from the monitoring means at the time of activation. Time processing is executed (for example, when a power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the control start is waited until the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped. Second effect control CPU012IW120b However, when the process of step 099IWS001 and 099IWS002 is executed. On the other hand, when the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the acquired date and time information is input without waiting for the start of control. 2 The log information included as the system reset date and time of the effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area. The portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003), a predetermined signal is output from the monitoring means at startup . The initialization control is not started at the time of the operation, the initialization control is started after the output of the predetermined signal is stopped , the predetermined information is stored based on the instruction information from the first control means, and the monitoring means is started at the time of activation. It is characterized in that it stores specific information that can identify that only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means has restarted when a predetermined signal is not output from .
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means is until the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is a predetermined value (for example, + 8V) or more (for example, power supply monitoring). The control may not be started until the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped from the circuit 099IW127 (for example, the portion where the second staging control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002).
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(3) In the game machine of the above (1) or (2), a storage means (for example, backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped is provided. The second control means is provided when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to a predetermined value or more at the start of control (for example, a power supply monitoring circuit at the start of control). When the power cutoff signal is input from 099IW127 and then the power cutoff signal input is stopped), predetermined information regarding startup (for example, the power on date and time and the start of setting change) based on the instruction information from the first control means. A date / time, a setting confirmation start date / time, a RAM clear date / time, etc.) are stored in a storage means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 016IW120b executes processing such as step 099IWS205, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, and step 012IWS809). When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than the predetermined value at the start of control, the predetermined image is displayed on the display means and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, the second). When the system reset of the effect control board 012IW12b occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the process of step 099IWS204 is not executed, and the setting change command, the setting confirmation command, the initialization designation command, etc. Since it does not receive power-on commands, it does not store log information about them).
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(4) In the game machine of (3) above, the storage means are a first storage means (for example, a first log area for recording log information for a game store) and a second storage means (for example, for a game machine maker). Including the second log area for recording log information), the second control means is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value at the start of control. At that time, predetermined information regarding activation is stored in the first storage means based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may use step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809). When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than the predetermined value at the start of control, it is possible to specify that only the second control means has restarted. Specific information (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage means (for example, the portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the process of step 099IWS001 N and step 099IWS003). May be good.
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second control means includes a first backup process for storing control-related information in the first storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the first log area). , A second backup process for storing control-related information in the second storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the second log area) can be executed, and the first backup process stores one piece of information. The information may be stored in the storage area of the above, and the second backup process may store one piece of information in a plurality of storage areas (see, for example, FIG. 8-19).
According to such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 099IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the 2nd staging control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the backup memory board. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 099IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 099IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 099IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the staging control main process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution example of the backup process with different multiplicity. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of CPU exception event occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination process during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing in a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table, the character effect effect decision table, and the light guide plate effect decision table in a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows maintenance mode processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change time recording process. It is a flowchart which shows the present time setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting timing of the present time. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure date and time recording processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the recording timing of the log information of the power failure date and time. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the display screen in maintenance mode. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a gaming machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko gaming machine in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modification 5.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per ordinary figure", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained and a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit middle effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) a display 25A, a second hold display 25B, a normal figure hold display 25C, etc., a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) gives a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special figure game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process to determine whether or not the number of rounds that open the big prize opening has reached the set maximum number of executions, and if the maximum number of executions is reached, the big hit game state. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the staging operation using various staging devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the staging control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect process ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 099IW)
Next, the feature unit 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 099IW. In this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a passage gate 012IW041 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 in place of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected by the gate switch 012IW021 (see FIG. 8-2).

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1, the first special winning opening constituting the first large winning opening is formed on the right side of the game area. A variable winning device 012IW007a and a second special variable winning device 012IW007a constituting the second large winning opening are provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is detected by the first count switch 012IW023a (see FIG. 8-2). Further, the game ball that has won a prize in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the second count switch 012IW023b (see FIG. 8-2). Further, a so-called V winning area is provided in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, and the game ball that has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is a V winning switch 012IW024 (FIG. 8-. 2) is detected.

In this example, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 is detected by the winning opening switch 012IW010a (see FIG. 8-2).

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) inputs the detection signal from the gate switch 012IW021 (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 012IW041), the game ball passes through the passing gate 012IW041. Controls to transmit a gate passage designation command for specifying that the passage has passed to the second staging control board 012IW12b. Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 inputs the detection signal from the winning opening switch 012IW010a (when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 10), the winning opening for designating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. Control is performed to transmit the winning designation command to the second staging control board 012IW12b.

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives, for example, a command indicating that the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is full from the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board. , Controls to transmit a full tank detection command indicating that the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has been detected to the second effect control board 012IW12b. The payout control microcomputer may, for example, confirm whether or not a detection signal from a full tank switch for detecting a full tank state provided in the hit ball supply dish (lower dish) has been input to hit the ball. It is possible to detect the full state of the supply plate (lower plate).

In this example, since the passing gate 012IW041 is provided in the right area of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the high base state, the player shoots at the right side of the game area. It is advantageous to perform the operation (so-called right-handed operation). Further, in this example, since the first special variable winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b are provided in the right area of the game area, the player performs a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Is advantageous.

On the other hand, in this example, when the gaming state is not controlled to the high base state (that is, controlled to the low base state) and the jackpot game is not in progress, the player aims at the left side of the gaming area. It is considered that it is easier for the game ball to win the first start winning opening and it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (so-called left-handed operation).

In this feature unit 099IW, for example, a 16-round jackpot game is executed in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is used. It is controlled to be open until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and in the fourth round, the second special variable winning is won. The device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. Then, on condition that the game ball wins in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b in the fourth round, the game state is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game ends. In this example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, winning in the V winning area is a condition, but the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period (29.5 seconds in this example). Therefore, it will be generally controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is completed.

In the feature unit 099IW, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is subjected to the jackpot opening process (step S115) and the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) of the special symbol process process (step S25). When it is detected that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b (specifically, when an on signal from the V winning switch 012IW024 is input), the game ball is placed in the V winning area. Control is performed to transmit a V prize designation command for designating that a prize has been won (a V prize has occurred) to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b.

Further, in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot), for example, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a Is controlled to the open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and the second special variable is performed in the fourth round. The winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until a very short period (0.1 seconds in this example) elapses. In this example, in the case of a normal jackpot, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in the open state in the fourth round as in the case of the probability variation jackpot, but for an extremely short period (0.1 in this example). Since it is only released for a second), it is rarely controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is over.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b are mounted in place of the staging control board 12 shown in FIG.

The first staging control board 012IW12a, which receives power from the power supply board, includes a first staging control CPU 012IW120a, ROM012IW121a, RAM012IW122a, a display control unit 012IW123, and an I / O 012IW125a. The first effect control CPU 012IW120a has a function of receiving a command from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and executing the effect based on the received command. Further, in this example, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B is input to the first staging control CPU 012IW120a mounted on the first staging control board 012IW12a. In this example, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a is set to have a timer interrupt time of 10 ms at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

The second staging control board 012IW12b, which receives power from the power supply board, includes a second staging control CPU 012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, RAM012IW122b, a random number circuit 012IW124, I / O012IW125b, a real-time clock 012IW126, and a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127. The second effect control CPU012IW120b has a function of executing the effect control main process, and also receives and receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 that receives power from the power supply board. It has a function to execute the effect control process processing based on the effect control command (however, it controls the effect means such as the actual image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and stick controller 31A. The control of the portion that accepts the input from the input means such as the push button 31B is performed on the first effect control CPU 012IW120a side). In this example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set to have a timer interrupt time of 10 ms at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of recording predetermined log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Although the details will be described later, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b also has a function of recording predetermined log information in a log area provided in the RAM 012IW 122b by using the date and time information output by the real-time clock 012IW126. The RAM012IW122b is backed up by a backup power supply mounted on a power supply board (not shown), and even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the log information recorded in the log area is retained for at least a predetermined period.

The power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 monitors the power supply supplied to the second staging control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V), the power supply cutoff signal is sent to the second staging control CPU 012IW120b. Is output. Specifically, the power off signal is turned on (low level). In the feature unit 099IW, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 is provided on the second staging control board 012IW12b, but is not limited to such a configuration, and is not limited to such a configuration, for example, a relay board on the power supply board or between the power supply board. It may be provided on the top. In this case, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be configured to be able to output a power supply cutoff signal to the main board 11, the second staging control board 012IW12b, the first staging control board 012IW12a, and the like. Further, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be provided on the main board 11 so that the main board 11 can output a signal corresponding to the power supply cutoff signal to the second staging control board 012IW12b.

In the second staging control board 012IW12b, a power supply circuit of + 12V to + 3V or + 1V is generated by the power supply circuit mounted on the second staging control board 012IW12b. The second staging control CPU012IW120b can operate if + 3V is supplied (for example, the core operates at + 1V and communication with the ROM becomes possible at + 3V), but the power supply circuit that generates + 3V or + 1V is available. , Since + 3V can be generated if + 4 to 5V is supplied, there is a possibility that the operation will occur before the power is stably supplied.

Therefore, when the power is supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives a power supply cutoff signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, the supplied power supply voltage is a predetermined value). During (for example, while it is less than + 8V), control is not started, and when the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped (that is, the supplied power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value (for example, + 8V) or more, and the power supply is turned on. It is configured to start control (when it is stably supplied). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second staging control CPU012IW120b from operating before the power is stably supplied.

If the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the power supply is started when the control of the second staging control CPU012IW120b is started (that is, when the operation becomes possible). A power supply cutoff signal is input from the monitoring circuit 099IW127, and after a waiting period until the input of the power supply cutoff signal is stopped (that is, until the supplied power supply voltage rises and exceeds a predetermined value (for example, + 8V)), The control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started (corresponding to the process in the case of Y in step 099IWS001 described later). Further, in this case, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives at least an initialization designation command or a recovery command from the game control microcomputer 100.

On the other hand, if the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the power supply of the gaming machine itself is not stopped, and the control of the second effect control CPU012IW120b becomes operable (that is, it can be operated). (When), the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, the supplied power supply voltage has already risen and therefore exceeds a predetermined value (for example, + 8V)), and the standby period is set. The control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started without passing through (corresponding to the process in the case of N in step 099IWS001 described later). Further, in this case, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not transmit a power-on command such as an initialization designation command or a recovery command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Therefore, the second effect control CPU012IW120b may have a power failure of the gaming machine itself due to the presence or absence of a standby period at the start of control (that is, when the operation becomes possible), such as a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b. Can be identified as to whether or not has occurred. Specifically, when the second effect control CPU012IW120b has a standby period at the start of control (that is, after it becomes operable, the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply changes from less than a predetermined value to more than a predetermined value. Is notified from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 by the state of the power supply cutoff signal), it can be specified that the power cutoff of the gaming machine itself has occurred. Further, when the second staging control CPU012IW120b has no standby period at the start of control (that is, when it becomes operable, the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is already equal to or higher than a predetermined value from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127. When notified by the state of the power cutoff signal), it can be specified that the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b has occurred. Hereinafter, the expressions of power failure of the gaming machine itself and restarting of the gaming machine itself are used, but this is at least the electricity of the main board 11 and the staging control board (for example, the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b). It is a concept that includes a disconnection or restart.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the second staging control board 012IW12b is interconnected with the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is a board for storing backup data provided separately from the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, and the backup data is backed up according to the backup control signal from the second effect control board 012IW12b. It is configured to be able to execute write processing and read processing. In the backup data writing process, the backup data is written and stored in the backup data memory. In the backup data read process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the second staging control board 012IW12b or the like.

FIG. 8-3 shows a configuration example of the second staging control board 012IW12b. Some or all of the electronic components such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, and RAM012IW122b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b can be attached to and detached from the connector socket by inserting and removing the connector pin. It may be attached, and other components may be attached so as to be mountable by soldering or the like. A connector 099IW150, a connector 099IW151, a connector 099IW154, and a connector 099IW156 are mounted on the second staging control board 012IW12b together with these electronic components. Further, the second effect control board 012IW12b is configured to include a plurality of electronic components such as the serial communication circuit 099IW137 in addition to the electronic components such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, and RAM012IW122b.

The serial communication circuit 099IW137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data by a serial communication method to various boards and circuits other than the second staging control board 012IW12b. The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a plurality of types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. The UART is a pace-synchronous serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using a start bit and a stop bit. In this case, the clock signal line becomes unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) becomes relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock-synchronized serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines corresponding to each of a clock signal, a transmission data signal, a reception data signal, and a slave selection signal are provided. In the case of I2C, a clock signal and a signal line corresponding to each of the data signals are provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 099IW137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards.

The connector 099IW150, the connector 099IW151, the connector 099IW154, and the connector 099IW156 are configured by using, for example, a receptacle, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device to which various signal wirings can be detachably connected. The connector 099IW150, the connector 099IW151, the connector 099IW154, and the connector 099IW156 enable various signals to be output via different routes such as different wiring patterns on the second effect control board 012IW12b. The connector 099IW150 is a connector port for main board wiring to which main board wiring electrically connected to and from the main board 11 can be connected. The connector 099IW151 is a connector port for power supply wiring to which a power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 099IW154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 099IW14 can be connected. The connector 099IW156 is a connector port for inspection wiring to which inspection wiring electrically connected to an information processing device for inspection, testing, or development (such as a personal computer) can be connected. The information processing device for inspection may function as an inspection device for the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, by executing a specific software program. As described above, the connector 099IW156 is an electronic component used as a connecting member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected.

The connector 099IW156 enables connection of inspection wiring, for example, at the prototype stage, development stage, or manufacturing stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the second production control CPU012IW120b is shipped in response to a test command different from the production control command. The previous inspection process may be enabled. The inspection process before shipment includes, for example, internal parameters and input / output signals when the second staging control CPU012IW120b executes a part or all of the program code before the completion of the software program during trial production or development. It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the island where the gaming machine is installed, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be used alone as a personal computer. It may be an execution environment in which the operating status can be confirmed by connecting to an information processing device such as. Further, the connector 099IW156 can be connected to the inspection wiring, for example, at the collection stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can execute the backup data reading process in response to a test command different from the staging control command. good. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 may be removed, for example, at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 is mounted only on a predetermined model such as a demonstration machine or a test machine other than the model in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and is mass-produced and installed in the game hall (mass production machine). It may not be installed. A land on which the connector 099IW156 can be mounted may be formed on the substrate surface of the second staging control board 012IW12b. When the connector 099IW156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the connector 099IW156 is no longer mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portion of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed by, for example, using a cream solder printing machine or by any method without using a cream solder printing machine. .. In the case where the connector 099IW156 is mounted and the case where the connector 099IW156 is not mounted, the soldering treatment in the same process may be performed, or the soldering treatment in different processes may be performed. When the soldering process in the same process is performed, it is not necessary to fabricate a plurality of patterns of metal masks used in the cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost required for substrate fabrication. By soldering unmounted lands that do not mount electronic components such as connector 099IW156, oxidation of the copper foil pattern is prevented, problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern are prevented, and the quality of the board is maintained appropriately. be able to.

When the electronic component such as the connector 099IW156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to the one coated by soldering, and for example, a resist which is an insulating film is applied. It may be covered. By covering the land on which electronic components are not mounted by any method in this way, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and maintain appropriate board quality. I hope I can. On the other hand, the land on which the electronic component is not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when the land is soldered, the solder as a conductor adheres to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, for lands on which electronic components are not mounted, soldering is not performed to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in the wiring pattern and changes in the current path, and ensure appropriate board quality. Can be maintained. By performing an insulating film treatment instead of the solder treatment, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuit of the wiring pattern and change of the current path, and maintain the quality of the substrate appropriately. You may do so.

FIG. 8-4 (A) shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with a memory controller 099IW200, RTC099IW201, a serial communication circuit 099IW202, an inspection connection unit 099IW203, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, and a connector 099IW220. As described above, the backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 099IW200 can execute backup data write processing and read processing according to the backup control signal from the second staging control board 012IW12b. The RTC099IW201 can measure the current date and time and supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 099IW200. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the second staging control board 012IW12b by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 may include a communication processing unit having a hardware configuration corresponding to such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connection portion 099IW203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including a terminal capable of inputting / outputting an inspection signal, such as a test point. When the inspection connection unit 099IW203 is the test point, the test probe is brought into contact with the inspection connection unit 099IW203, and the inspection signal is transmitted between the inspection device and the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. It suffices if it can perform input / output and read backup data. The inspection connection unit 099IW203 is an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 or the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D without going through the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. It may be possible to input / output and read backup data. As described above, the inspection connection unit 099IW203 can provide an interface for data communication with the inspection device as an external device on the backup memory board 099IW14.

The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM® (Ferroelectric RAM), and some or all may be a SRAM (Static RAM) with a battery. May be configured using. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured by using a flash memory such as a NAND-ROM, an EEPROM, or an HDD (Hard Disk Drive). The non-volatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and is a memory written in the memory cell even when the operating power is turned off. No data is lost. The configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require battery backup for data retention, and has higher speed writing, higher number of rewrites, and lower power consumption than non-volatile memory such as flash memory, EEPROM, and HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve the operation efficiency, and appropriately store and store the backup data. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to dispose of the battery, it is possible to prevent the stored contents from being lost due to the replacement of the battery, and the backup data can be appropriately stored and stored. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. As described above, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be capable of retaining the stored contents without using a backup power source, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210B may be capable of holding the stored contents by using a backup power source, for example, when a part or all of the backup data memories are configured by using the SRAM with a battery.

The backup memory board 099IW14 stores and stores various log information in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D by using the date and time information output by the RTC099IW201. The memory controller 099IW200 can execute a storage data writing process and a reading process for the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D in response to an instruction or an instruction sent from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. .. In this case, by executing the writing process and the reading process of the stored data indicating the log information including the date and time information, the operation history, the setting history, and the operation history and the setting history of the plurality of electronic components used for the game and the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. It suffices if the error history can be stored so that it can be verified after the fact.

FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a configuration example for connecting the second staging control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14. The second effect control board 012IW12b includes a connector 099IW154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 includes a connector 099IW220 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 099IW154 of the second staging control board 012IW12b. By connecting the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220, the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 can be physically and electrically connected. The connector 099IW154 provided on the second staging control board 012IW12b includes terminals TM01 to TM06. The connector 099IW220 provided on the backup memory board 099IW14 includes terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 included in the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 included in the connector 099IW220 have the corresponding terminals (for example, the terminal TM01 and the terminal TM11) physically and electrically when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are combined. Any relationship may be used as long as it is connected to.

The terminal TM01 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second staging control board 012IW12b can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second staging control board 012IW12b can receive VD1 of a specific voltage used for confirming the connection with the backup memory board 099IW14. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b is supplied to the terminal TM11 included in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 may be short-circuited on the board of the backup memory board 099IW14. Therefore, when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are coupled, the voltage corresponding to VD1 is transmitted from the terminal TM12 of the connector 099IW220 on the backup memory board 099IW14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 on the second staging control board 012IW12b. Is supplied. On the other hand, in the unconnected state in which the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in the second staging control board 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, the effect control CPU012IW120b determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 099IW14. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are connected (connection state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to the voltage not supplied, it is determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are not connected (not connected state). can. In this way, the connection state between the second staging control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM02 which is the connection confirmation member. The connection state is not limited to the one that confirms the connection state based on the terminal voltage, and may be, for example, the one that confirms the connection state based on the input state of a specific signal. Alternatively, a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 included in the connector 099IW154 of the second staging control board 012IW12b are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW137 included in the second staging control board 012IW12b. The terminals TM13 and TM14 included in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW202. Therefore, the wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 is the second production control CPU012IW120b and the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137 and the serial communication circuit 099IW202. An electrical connection is provided so that the stored data can be transferred between the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D. The terminals TM15 and TM16 included in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wired and connected to the inspection connection portion 099IW203. As a result, the wiring connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 099IW220 is connected to the second effect control CPU012IW120b and the inspection connection portion of the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137. It provides an electrical connection to and from 099IW203 so that inspection signals can be sent and received and stored data can be transferred.

The backup memory board 099IW14 is configured to be detachably attached to the second staging control board 012IW12b. As a result, for example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that does not use the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed to increase the flexibility of the device configuration and increase the manufacturing cost. Can be prevented. Further, since the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed to read and analyze the stored data, the work load of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The real-time clock 012IW126 provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b may provide a current time for timing adjustment for executing an effect in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are interlocked, and has relatively high accuracy. Things are needed. On the other hand, the RTC099IW201 of the backup memory board 099IW14 only needs to be able to specify the context of the storage processing executed for the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D. Can be done. As described above, since the RTC099IW201 of the backup memory board 099IW14 may have a relatively low accuracy, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost. The configuration and functions of the backup memory board 099IW14 may be configured to be included in the second staging control board 012IW12b. For example, the configuration and function of the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be realized by the RAM012IW122b. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern on the second staging control board 012IW12b, or the switch or sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-5, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 012IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 012IW003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the game machine frame 012IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 012IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 012IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 012IW003a, and when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game hall clerk into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and glass. The door frame 012IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 012IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key 012IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 012IW051, is housed in the board case 012IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 012IW051 does not open the board case 012IW201. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side of the substrate case 012IW201 so that it can be operated.

Since the board case 012IW201 having the setting key 012IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key of. Further, since the setting key 012IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 012IW051. The setting key 012IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 099IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, the board case 012IW201 is provided with a display monitor 012IW029 and a display changeover switch 012IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 012IW029. The display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 012IW201. That is, the display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 012IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 012IW051 in the feature unit 099IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a risk that the setting key 012IW051 will be operated from the inside of the game island to be installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a is the right end portion of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. A security cover 012IW500A that covers the back side is attached. The curity cover 012IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 012IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 012IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 012IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 012IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 012IW201. Further, the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the long piece 012IW500Ab abuts (or is close to) the right portion of the board case 012IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Thereby, the right side portion of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 012IW051 becomes inoperable due to the long piece 012IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-6, in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the setting key 012IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and separates from the long piece 012IW500Ab. When the covering state by 012IW500Ab is released, it becomes an operable state.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099IW is maintained in a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 012IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted.

Since the board case 012IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Unless the pachinko / pachislot machine frame 012IW003 is opened by the door key or the like, the setting key 012IW051 cannot be operated to change the set value.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 012IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the machines and the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility of fraudulent acts such as changing the set value by operating, the security cover 012IW500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 while the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a restricted state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500A, the board case 012IW201 is housed in the board case 012IW201 through the transparent security cover 012IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the sealing seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In this feature unit 099IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -7 (C) and the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 8-9, a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value in the order of 2, 3 is, the higher the advantage is stepwise. In this feature unit 099IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
8-7 (A) to 8-7 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You are supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change) than the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/280 for non-probability change, 1/28 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is used. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the value of the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The winning probability of a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 099IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 099IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is made depending on whether the first special symbol is variable display or the second special symbol variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using a separate table for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the present feature unit 099IW, the case where the advantage is increased in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is generated with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. In a specific gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other gaming states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

In the feature unit 099IW, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature unit 099IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-10, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2". When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 099IW will be described with reference to FIG. 8-8 (B). In the feature section 099IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b. After that, it is a period during which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big winning opening is opened on the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b. This is the period during which the interval effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the next round is executed after the end of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the end of the jackpot gaming state is notified on the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b. This is the period during which the ending effect as the effect action to be performed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 099IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In this feature unit 099IW, the set value is configured to increase in the order of "1" <"2" <" 3" so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit increases, but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling can be achieved. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 099IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is used for a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly performed.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A <B <C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 099IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 099IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the game is in a big hit game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. In this feature unit 099IW, the ratio of big hits is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, there is no difference in advantage between the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.), and the fanfare period and interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In this feature unit 099IW, an example is exemplified in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined by a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Includes determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 099IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the present feature unit 099IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 099IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 099IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the type of big hit. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 as the property (so-called V probability variation type), the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In (middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state or a jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8-8 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (C), in the feature unit 099IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (C), in the feature unit 099IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "3".

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the opening period and the number of opening times of the large winning opening during the small hit game are the same regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". The small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 099IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and other periods (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 099IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B), normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), and is a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and 8-9 (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, depending on the set value, at times other than non-reach loss. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <" 3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". It is configured so that the ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 099IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. It is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

The feature unit 099IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and 8-9 (B) is used. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment during the special period or the period from the time when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 099IW, and for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is different from the usual one and the setting value is 1 or 2). (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 099IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 8-9 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 099IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In this feature unit 099IW, the set value is configured to increase in the order of "1" <"2" <" 3" so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit increases, but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 099IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by differentiating the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the decorative pattern shaking display and the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to produce the effect. It is desirable that there is no difference in the appearance.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative pattern (final) The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the setting in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is high may make the fluctuation time longer.

The feature unit 099IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time as compared with other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. The variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 099IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 099IW, the variation time may be different depending on the set value for the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099IW will be described. 8-11 to 8-13 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 099IW. In the feature unit 099IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 sets the time until the effect control means (specifically, the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer for waiting for the activation of the effect control means for measurement is set (step 012IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation wait timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 012IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 012IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 012IWS004 and the processes of steps 012IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 012IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 012IWS006 are executed after waiting until the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are started, and the setting value is changed, confirmed, and RAM. Initialization and recovery processing are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are started. It is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch was pressed when the power was turned on to the gaming machine (step 012IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power cutoff process (see step 012IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is once cleared by step 012IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, a case is shown in which a RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 012IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power cutoff process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. May be good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4 (step 012IWS007). Specifically, in step 012IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 012IWS008). In step 012IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 012IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 012IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3". (Step 012IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values "1" to "3", the process proceeds to step 012IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 012IWS008), or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 012IWS009). Is set by the CPU 103 with a RAM error flag indicating that an error has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values "1" to "3" (N in step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed is set (step 012IWS011). If the setting changing flag is set (step 012IWS011; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

In step 012IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS012). If the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS013). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 012IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear process includes a RAM clear 1 process (see step 012IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 process (see step 012IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the connection ratio and the connection ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS016), and proceeds to step 012IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is off (N in step 012IWS012), when the setting key 012IW051 is off (N in step 012IWS013), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 012IWS013). In step 012IWS014 N), the CPU 103 controls to transmit a set value abnormality error command to the second staging control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 012IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 012IWS018). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 012IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor 012IW029 to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating that a RAM error has occurred. Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 012IWS020). Then, the processes after step 012IWS018 are repeatedly executed.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS007 to S020, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 099IW (N in steps 012IWS007 and S008, Y in step 012IWS009), and a power failure occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y of step 012IWS011), the RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting key 012IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, and the set value after step 012IWS025. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened and the setting key 012IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 012IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processes of step 012IWS022 and step 012IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first detected to be turned on when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. After that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes to check whether the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. However, by checking whether the RAM clear flag is set or not, instead of checking the status of the clear switch directly, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. (See steps 012IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS023). If the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS024). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS026). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a setting change command indicating that the setting change process for changing the setting value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (). Step 012IWS027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM error flag is set (step 012IWS028). If the RAM error flag is set (that is, if an error in the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 fills the set value confirmation buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current set value). Set to the set value "1" (step 012IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM error flag.

When the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b receive a setting confirmation command or a setting change command, they control to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example). , A predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, when the operation buttons for the effect such as the push button 31B are pressed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, "maintenance mode" or the like is displayed and the mode shifts to the maintenance mode. It may be configured to do so. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock 012IW126, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the change). It is a mode in which you can check the recording of the set value of. When the setting key 012IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 012IWS030). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS031 and executes the power cutoff process (step 012IWS031). In the power cutoff process of step 012IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power cutoff signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on). The power supply cutoff signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power off processing, when the CPU 103 detects that the power off signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop processing for storing necessary data (for example, a backup flag, a checksum) in the backup RAM area. do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 012IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 012IWS043 as it is.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial set flag indicating that the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the power of the gaming machine is turned on is set (step 012IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting an input state (whether it is an on state or an off state) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the gaming machine is turned on), the process proceeds to step 012IWS039 as it is.

If the initially set flag is not set (that is, if the value has never been set in the clear switch buffer since the gaming machine was turned on), the CPU 103 puts the clear switch buffer on. The indicated value (for example, "1") is set (step 012IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial set flag (step 012IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 012IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is on or off) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the previous clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set if the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of "0" is set if the clear switch is in the off state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 012IWS040). Next, in the CPU 103, the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state (for example, "0"), and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state (for example, "1"). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 012IWS041).

If the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. It is displayed and stored in the set value confirmation buffer (updated and stored for the already stored set value) (step 012IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "2", and the set value "2" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "3", and the set value "3" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "1", and the set value "1" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS043). If the setting key 012IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030, the processes of steps 012IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 012IW051 is turned off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 012IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) by executing the above steps 012IWS025 to S043 (steps 012IWS025, S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 012IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) (Y in steps 012IWS025 and S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 012IWS027). At the same time, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 012IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 012IWS033. , Step 012 The security information timer is set in IWS044, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, by executing the process of step 012IWS020, the security signal is output externally even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs. In this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is reset.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 012IWS049. The processing of steps 012IWS049 and S050 in the feature unit 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process and performs the process of clearing the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (012IWS051). The processing of steps 012IWS052 to S055 in the feature unit 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 8-14 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are executed, and the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is executed, and the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 012IW051 is off when the power is turned on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed if the clear switch is on, and if the clear switch is off, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed. Only the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (A) and 8-15 (B), when the power is turned off (power cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 012IW051 is turned on. The setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the clerk of the amusement park or the like in the setting change process. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ... Every time the clear switch is operated). Further, the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 012IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the operation of the clerk of the game hall or the like, thereby turning off the display monitor 012IW029. Notify the clerk or the like that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-15 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 099IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting change process is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 099IW), or the most advantageous for the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 099IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 8-15, the case where the set value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 012IW029 when the set value is confirmed or changed is shown. The set value may be displayed by using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 012IW029, for example. Further, for example, the display monitor 012IW029 may be configured to display the set value by performing a dedicated 4-digit display. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays four digits of "-S-1", or if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays "-S-2". The 4-digit display of "-S-3" may be performed on the display monitor 012IW029 if the set value is "3". Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 012IW029. For example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays the four digits of "1111", and if the setting value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays the four digits of "2222". You may.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 099IW will be described. 8-16 and 8-17 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 012IWS171). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 012IWS172). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 012IWS173). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 012IWS174).

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS172 to S174, in the feature unit 099IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 012IWS175). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 012IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 012IWS177). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the second staging control board 012IW12b (step 012IWS178). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the process of step 012IWS047. However, even after the power is turned on, the step By executing the process of 012IWS178, a set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS178, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send commands. For example, in step 012IWS047, a command for directly specifying a set value (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) according to the set values "1" to "3") is transmitted, while in step 012IWS178, the set value is set. A identifiable variation pattern command may be transmitted, and the variation pattern commands may be configured to be prepared for the number of set values (for example, for the setting value "1", commands 1C00 (H) to are prepared as variation pattern commands. , The setting value "2" may be configured to prepare commands 2C00 (H) or more as fluctuation pattern commands, and the setting value "3" may be configured to prepare commands 3C00 (H) or more as fluctuation pattern commands.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, even if the same variation pattern is used, if a different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value, the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example). ) Minute fluctuation pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern command corresponding to the set value. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is sent only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 012IWS047) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 012IWS178) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting the fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different setting value commands may be sent at the time of turning on the power and at the starting of the fluctuation. good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to send the staging control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) can be output on the game control microcomputer 100 side regardless of the set value, and either the first effect control CPU012IW120a or the second effect control CPU012IW120b can be output. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof are different depending on the set value of. For example, if the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by the ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b according to the current gaming state (step 012IWS179). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probabilistic state background specification command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background specification command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8-7) with a random number value MR1, and if they match, a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit is performed. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 012IWS181). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 012IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 012IWS182), and proceeds to step 012IWS186.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 012IWS181), that is, if the value is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 012IWS186 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the big hit determination values (Y in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 012IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 8-8) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 012IWS184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS185). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 012IWS186). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an outlier symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 012IWS187).

(Main processing of staging control)
Next, the operation of the staging control means in the feature unit 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-18 (A) is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the feature unit 099IW.

In the effect control main process, first, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (step 099IWS001). When the power cutoff signal is input (Y in step 099IWS001), the second staging control CPU012IW120b determines that the gaming machine itself has been disconnected (that is, the gaming machine itself has restarted). It waits until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped (N in step 099IWS002). Then, when the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped (Y in step 099IWS002), the process proceeds to the process of step 099IWS201.

When the power cutoff signal has not been input from the beginning of the process (Y in step 099IWS001), the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred in the second effect control CPU012IW120b (that is, for the second effect control). It is determined that only the CPU012IW120b has restarted), the date and time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the storage process of the log information including the input date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is executed (step 012IWS003). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 099IWS201.

In the feature unit 099IW, the processing of steps 099IWS201 to S202 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S72 shown in FIG. In the initialization process of step 099IWS201, the feature unit 099IW controls to display an initial image (as long as it is an image that can be recognized that the gaming machine is operating) on the image display device 5. Not limited to such a configuration, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the initial image only when it is determined that the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b has occurred, or the game machine itself is restarted. By controlling the display of different initial images when it is determined that only the second effect control CPU012IW120b has restarted, the startup history (that is, the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b, etc.) (Whether or not has occurred) may be recognizable at a glance.

When the initial operation control process of step 012IWS202 is executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not determine that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred (N of step 012IWS203), the date and time from the real-time clock 012IW126. Information is input, and storage processing of log information including the input date and time information as the power-on date and time is executed (step 012IWS204).

By executing the processes of step 012IWS003 and step 012IWS204, the data indicating the log information including the system reset date and time or the power-on date and time is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Written and stored as. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b transmits a control signal corresponding to a backup command for turning on the power to the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137. In the backup memory board 099IW14, the memory controller 099IW200 may respond to a backup command indicated by a control signal received via the serial communication circuit 099IW202 and execute a process of writing log information including a system reset date and time or a power-on date and time. ..

In the feature unit 099IW, in the effect control main process, when the power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control of the second effect control CPU012IW120b, the gaming machine itself is disconnected ( That is, it is determined that the gaming machine itself has restarted), and the start of control is waited until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped (corresponding to the processing of Y and 099IWS002 in step 099IWS001). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the storage process of the log information including the power-on date and time (corresponding to the process of step 099IWS204). In addition, when the gaming machine itself is cut off (that is, the gaming machine itself is restarted), commands at power-on such as setting change commands, setting confirmation commands, initialization specification commands, and recovery commands from the main board 11 Is transmitted, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes processing based on those commands (for example, corresponding to processing of steps 012IWS802, 012IWS805, 012IWS809, etc., which will be described later). Further, the storage process of the log information including the power failure date and time (for example, corresponding to the process of step 012IWS847 described later) is also executed.

On the other hand, in the effect control main process, when the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred in the second effect control CPU012IW120b. That is, it is determined that only the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has restarted), and the log information including the system reset date and time is stored in the log area without waiting for the start of control (corresponding to the process of step 099IWS003). When a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs (that is, only the second effect control CPU012IW120b is restarted), a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command are performed from the main board 11. Since the command at the time of turning on the power is not transmitted, the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not execute the process based on those commands. In addition, the log information storage process including the power-on date and time and the log information storage process including the power-off date and time are not executed.

As described above, in the feature unit 099IW, when the control of the second staging control CPU012IW120b is started (that is, when the operation becomes possible), the gaming machine itself is turned off (that is, the gaming machine itself is restarted) and the second. It is possible to specify which of the system reset of the effect control CPU 012IW120b (that is, the restart of only the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) has occurred. Then, when a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, a process of storing log information including the system reset date and time is executed, a process of waiting for the start of control (Y, 099IWS002 in step 099IWS001), and a power supply. Second production control even if necessary when a power failure occurs in the game machine itself, such as storage processing of log information including the input date and time (step 099IWS204) and storage processing of log information including the power interruption date and time (step 012IWS847 described later). When the system of the CPU 012IW120b is reset, unnecessary processing is not executed. Therefore, the situation at the time of turning on the power can be suitably determined, and the optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

In the feature unit 099IW, in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14, as the log area for recording the log information, the first log area for recording the log information for the game store and the log information for the game machine maker. It is configured to provide a second log area for recording. Then, when the gaming machine itself is disconnected, a storage process for storing the log information including the power-on date and time and the log information including the power-on date and time information in the first log area is executed (steps 012IWS204, 012IWS847). Equivalent to processing). On the other hand, when the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs instead of the power failure of the game machine itself, the storage process of storing the log information including the system reset date and time in the second log area is executed (step). Equivalent to the processing of 012IWS003).

In the feature unit 099IW, the inspection device is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the log information recorded in the second log area, and the inspection device and the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b are connected to each other. , Read by inputting and outputting inspection signals. That is, it has an output means for outputting log information that can specify the activation history. With such a configuration, log information including the system reset date and time can be used as information for development and debugging of the gaming machine maker.

There are various types of log information to be backed up, such as system data, effect control error data, and received command data. In this example, the first log area is displayed as history information in the maintenance mode. Log information is stored. For example, log information such as a power-on date / time, a setting change start date / time, a setting confirmation start date / time, and a RAM clear date / time is stored (steps 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, 012IWS809, etc.). 8-47).

On the other hand, log information used as information for development and debugging is stored in the second log area. For example, log information such as the system reset date and time, exception event information described later, and received command data is stored (a part for executing processing such as step 099IWS003 and 099IWS42).

In the feature unit 099IW, the log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode, but is not limited to such a configuration and is recorded in the second log area. A part or all of the log information (excluding the one that overlaps with the log information recorded in the first log area) may be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Further, when a predetermined backup condition is satisfied, for example, when a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, log information is stored in both the first log area and the second log area. The process may be executed. The classification of the log information stored in the first log area and the second log area is not limited to the configuration of this example. Further, 3 or more log areas may be provided.

Further, the backup method may be different between the first log area and the second log area. For example, when the backup method is batch backup, the data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt process once, and when the backup method is split backup. The data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt process multiple times. In this way, by properly using the backup method, backup can be appropriately performed according to the log information.

Further, the backup multiplicity may be different between the first log area and the second log area. The degree of multiplicity is the degree of mirroring in which backup target data indicating the same log information is stored in a distributed manner while overlapping in a plurality of different log areas. You can specify the number of times. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once. When the multiplicity is "2", mirroring is performed twice, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas for backup. When the multiplicity is "3", the mirroring is performed three times, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored in different storage areas three times for backup. By increasing the degree of multiplexing, redundancy (availability) can be improved and the reliability of stored data can be improved.

FIG. 8-19 shows an execution example of backup processing having different multiplicities. The second staging control CPU012IW120b has the functions of the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the functions of the occurrence event information creation processing units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22 by executing the program read from the ROM012IW121b. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210C of the backup memory board 099IW14 are provided with backup storage units 43AKA21 together with backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 includes backup storage areas 43AKA111 to 43AKA113 as log areas, the backup storage unit 43AKA12 includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas, and the backup storage unit 43AKA13 has log areas. As a backup storage area 43AKA131 to 43AKA133. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 includes backup storage areas 43AKA211 to 43AKA213 as log areas.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition having a multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM 11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM 21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 while being duplicated. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The next backup data acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKA21 is the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition having a multiplicity of "1" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. Further, the multiplicity corresponds to "1", and a single backup data is stored without being distributed without mirroring. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

The log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode, and cannot be confirmed without using a dedicated inspection device, for example, so some log information is missing. Although it is permissible (at least not a problem for the administrator of the game machine in the game store), the log information recorded in the first log area is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode. , It is desirable that the backup is surely performed.

However, for example, a part or all of the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 are configured by using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and serial communication circuit 099IW137 and serial communication. When the communication data is transmitted / received by the serial communication method via the circuit 099IW202 (for example, the communication speed is slower than that of the bus connection method), if the multiplicity is increased and the backup is performed, the backup is performed. It may take some time to complete the backup. Then, when the administrator of the gaming store immediately restarts the gaming machine in the situation where the predetermined error occurs, the predetermined error is not recorded as log information (that is, it is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen). It may not be done), which may give a feeling of distrust.

Therefore, regarding the log information to be stored in the first log area, the backup multiplicity is set to "1", and the backup target data indicating the log information is stored and backed up only once. Further, regarding the log information to be stored in the second log area, the backup multiplicity is set to "2" or "3", and the backup target data indicating the log information is stored and backed up only twice or three times. .. Further, the backup method to the first log area may be a batch backup so that the processing can be completed quickly, and the backup method to the second log area may be a divided backup to distribute the processing load. With such a configuration, the log information that should be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode is missing (for example, the backup process is not completed by the time the gaming machine is restarted). In addition to preventing this, it is possible to improve the redundancy (availability) of the log information stored in the second log area used as information for development and debugging by the gaming machine maker. That is, a suitable backup can be realized according to the characteristics of the log information.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the interrupt initial setting process (step 099IWS205). In the interrupt initial setting process of step 099IWS205, it is sufficient that the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second staging control board 012IW12b can be initially set. The priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller may be set based on the interrupt priority data stored in advance in the program management area or the like provided in the ROM 012IW121b. For example, the priority of the interrupt may be set so that the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set to interrupt permission (step 099IWS206), and then enters the loop process.

FIG. 8-18 (B) shows an example of setting the processing priority in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. The processing priority in the second staging control CPU 012IW120b is determined in advance based on the specifications of the second staging control board 012IW12a as well as the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second staging control board 012IW12a. If possible. As an example, the processing when a CPU exception event occurs has the highest priority, then the serial reception interrupt has the highest priority, and then the processing according to the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller has priority. It suffices if the processing priority is set in advance so as to be the degree.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing is a process executed when an exception event occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state or the like in the second staging control CPU012IW120b. The exception event of the second effect control CPU012IW120b may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may occur when an invalid operation such as division by zero or overflow is executed. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may occur when a storage protection violation in virtual memory occurs. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) error in which the conversion from the virtual address to the physical address becomes abnormal. As described above, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is satisfied, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing can be executed when the event occurrence condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device, such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, is satisfied.

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, the exception time preprocessing is executed (step 099IWS41). In the exception time preprocessing of step 099IWS41, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of, for example, RAM012IW122b. The control information for executing the instruction code may include the stored value of the program counter (PC: Program Counter) and the value of the program status word (PSW: Program Status Word). Following the exception time preprocessing, the exception time backup process is executed (step 099IWS42). In the exception time backup process of step 099IWS42, the storage process of the log information including the exception event information is executed. In this case, the control signal corresponding to the backup command for when an exception event occurs is transmitted to the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup command for when an exception event occurs includes exception event information that makes it possible to identify the exception event that occurred in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and date and time information acquired from the real-time clock 012IW126 (for example, date and time information acquired from RTC099IW201). It may be used). The exception event information may indicate the type of exception event in an identifiable manner. When the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 receives the backup instruction for when an exception event occurs, the memory controller 099IW200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the exception event information.

After the exception-time backup process, other exception-time processes are executed (step 099IWS43). In step 099IWS43, for example, the exception handling routine may be started by accessing the vector table and jumping to the acquired exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may be saved. If the exception event can be resolved by the exception handling routine, or if the exception event cannot be resolved and a reset occurs, the same backup process as in step 099IWS42 can be executed to resolve the exception event or resolve it. The log information when it does not exist may be memorable. When the exception time processing is completed, the exception time post-processing is executed (step 099IWS44), and the CPU exception event occurrence processing is terminated. In the exception post-processing of step 099IWS44, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the second staging control CPU012IW120b is restored, and the control information for executing the instruction code is restored, so that the processing before the occurrence of the exception event occurs. It should be possible to return to.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes the exception time backup processing of step 099IWS42. In the exception time backup process of step 099IWS42, as backup data indicating log information, data including exception event information regarding the second effect control CPU012IW120b among a plurality of electronic components is used as backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The write process for writing to the log area provided in is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the exception event of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs, assuming that the event generation condition corresponding to the internal state of the second staging control CPU012IW120b is satisfied. In this way, when the event generation condition according to the internal state of the control device or processing device such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b is satisfied, a plurality of electronic components are used for the storage area such as the log area. It is possible to execute a writing process for writing and storing information about.

After being set to interrupt permission by step 099IWS206 of the effect control main process, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 135 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), and the device is mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12a. An interrupt request signal corresponding to a timer interrupt for effect control is output from the interrupt controller to the second effect control CPU012IW120b. The second effect control CPU012IW120b, which has received the interrupt request signal and has received the interrupt request, starts executing the effect control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control timer interrupt process. In the feature unit 099IW, the processing of steps 012IWS204 to S208 is the same as the processing of steps S73 to S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number update process of step 012IWS208 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 012IWS209).

In this feature unit 099IW, it is possible to control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 012IWS209, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date and time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 012IWS209, when the second effect control CPU012IW120b changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the changed effect mode may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. .. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode B is changed, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to the effect mode C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The method of changing the staging mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as staging mode A → staging mode B → staging mode C → staging mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes error notification processing for performing various error notifications (step 012IWS210). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation, and executes the maintenance mode process for displaying the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen (step 012IWS211).

In the maintenance mode process of step 099IWS211, control is performed so that the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed. On the maintenance history screen, for example, when the setting confirmation display corresponding to the setting confirmation status or the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to be operated by the game hall staff is detected. Based on the result, it can be displayed when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all log information is read from the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (strictly speaking, the log for the game store among the log information). Only the information is read, and the log information for the game machine maker is not read). The image display device 5 displays a maintenance history screen that includes the read log information as history information. The setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the game hall. Become. When the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, all the setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The image display device 5 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen that includes read setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed even if they can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation performed by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, unlike the staff in the game hall. good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen are screens that cannot be visually recognized by the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game, and can be confirmed by the staff of the game hall or the person in charge at the manufacturer. Just do it.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the setting change time recording process for recording the date and time when the set value is changed in the setting change process (step 012IWS212). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the current time setting process for setting the current time during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS213). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a power failure date / time recording process for recording the power failure date / time when the power failure occurs (step 012IWS214). Then, after executing the backup process during the effect control (step 099IWS215), the effect control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the effect control timer backup process executed in step 099IWS215 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the preset backup condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied, the backup process for storing and storing the backup target data corresponding to the satisfied backup condition is executed. As the backup condition, it is sufficient that a plurality of different conditions can be set according to the occurrence of an event including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The backup control table showing a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (program management area or the like) provided in, for example, ROM012IW121b. The backup target data may include different data depending on the backup conditions. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to a plurality of backup conditions. Regardless of which backup condition is satisfied, the backup target data indicating the log information including the date and time information may be stored. As a backup method for storing the backup target data, a batch backup and a divided backup may be prepared. In the case of batch backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of divided backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of multiple timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the backup condition is executed every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, when the backup condition is satisfied in the effect control during backup process in step 099IWS215. It may be possible, or it may be possible to execute all at once when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the production control when the backup process is executed collectively at the time of power failure, for example, the backup target showing the log information including the date and time information in the predetermined area of the RAM012IW122b. Remember the data.

(Command analysis processing)
8-22 and 8-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step 012IWS206). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the receive command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 012IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 012IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 012IWS303). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 012IWS304), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 012IW 122b. (Step 012IWS305). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 012IWS306). In the feature unit 099IW, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And.

In addition, in this feature unit 099IW, the set value command is sent when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normal due to missing commands or garbled data. If the data cannot be received, the process of step 012IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 099IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 012IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read out on the second effect control CPU012IW120b side, the set value is set. It may be configured to determine whether or not the setting value included in the command is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If so, it may be configured to determine that the setting value included in the setting value command is abnormal. Further, for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is made to store the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value is received. If the setting value indicated by the command and the setting value stored last time do not match, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown in the feature unit 099IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
In the feature unit 099IW, when either the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process on the second staging control board 012IW12b side, the image display device 5 receives a predetermined initial stage. Control is performed to display a roll (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols that is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial roll effect). ).

If the received effect control command is an initialization specification command or a recovery command (step 012IWS307), the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS308). .. If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Based on the stored setting values, the even initial rolls (for example, "246" and "224"), which are a combination of even decorative symbols, and the odd decorative symbols are used using the initial roll determination table. Determine one of a combination of odd initial rolls (eg, "135", "113", etc.) and a special initial roll, which is a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (eg, star symbols) (step). 012IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

FIG. 8-24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 012IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area by using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 8-24 (A). Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined is higher in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd initial roll is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even initial roll is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the initial roll using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 8-24 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (the initial roll is determined). Step 012IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

Step 012 By executing the processes of IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 099IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 8-24 (A), for the set value "1", the ratio determined to be an odd initial result is the lowest, and it may not be determined to be a special initial result. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where the odd initial roll or the special initial roll is displayed and the player is disappointed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the staging mode A, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 012IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

FIG. 8-24 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-24 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value "3" which is most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS312 to S313, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 099IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. Despite this, the odd-numbered initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed by the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the initial rolls determined in steps 012IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 012IWS314).

Although the feature unit 099IW describes that the image display device 5 controls the display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on, and the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The second effect control CPU012IW120b does not directly control the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L, 8R. More specifically, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is the first effect control CPU012IW120a. Is transmitted a command for controlling the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the first effect control CPU012IW120a controls the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, and 8R based on the command from the second effect control CPU012IW120b to perform various effects and notifications. This also applies to other similar description points in the feature section 099IW.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines the initial output to be an even initial output and displays an image. In the device 5, control is performed to display an even initial result (step 012IWS315).

By executing the process of step 012IWS315, the feature unit 099IW uniformly displays an even initial result when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd-numbered initial roll symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 8-24 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial result is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the setting value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of "???" symbols as the initial result in the effect mode B. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 012IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is a set value abnormality error command (step 012IWS316), the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the set value abnormality error notification (step 012IWS317). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b displays a character display such as "a setting value abnormality error has occurred" in the image display device 5, or a voice or an error sound indicating a setting value abnormality error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED). In that case, it is desirable to make it emit light in white.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 012IWS320), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the received variation pattern command in the RAM 012IW122b. Store in the command storage area (step 012IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS322).

If the received staging control command is a display result specification command (a staging control command that specifies whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, a big hit type, and a small hit type) (step 012IWS323), the second staging The control CPU 012IW120b stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation specification command (effect control command that specifies that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 012IWS325), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the confirmation command reception flag. (Step 012IWS326).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS327), the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 012IWS328). ).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command that specifies the end of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS329), the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 012IWS330). ).

If the received effect control command is another command, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 012IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS301.

The feature unit 099IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the setting value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to an odd initial roll or an even initial roll, an initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so as to be displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, when the specific initial roll is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is 3. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial roll, one of these initial rolls may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 099IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The setting suggestion based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tendency, and the jackpot suggestion effect executed during the jackpot (for example, during the jackpot game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> big hit suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> big hit medium suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game, or the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be configurable. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. May be able to change.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the customer waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 012IWS502, step 012IWS503).

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 012IWS504), updates the value of the effect process flag to “1” (step 012IWS505), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b matches the predetermined condition with the timekeeping result by the timekeeping means unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 012IWS506). Check whether or not (step 012IWS507). In step 012IWS507, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when the variable display is not executed and a predetermined period elapses (and the game is not controlled to the big hit game state), or when the game is not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timekeeping result by the timekeeping means matches a predetermined condition, the second staging control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 012IWS508). That is, in step 012IWS508, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet. Whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 is specifically determined by the number of fluctuation counters for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the power is turned on to the gaming machine described later. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the value of (see step 012IWS603) is 0.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 012IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

In the feature unit 099IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect that is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. The decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color) when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed.

FIG. 8-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 012IWS510, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (A) is used to perform a lottery process based on random numbers according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area. Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 8-26 (A), determination values are assigned so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous setting value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting was changed when the power was turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS511). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the pre-game suggestion effect using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (A) assuming that the set value is "1". (Step 012IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

Steps 012 By executing the processes of IWS511 to S512, the feature unit 099IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. By making such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the staging mode A, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 012IWS513). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

FIG. 8-26 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestion effect as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS513 to S514, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 099IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be prevented.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 012IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 012IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS517.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS516 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 012IWS513, the feature unit 099IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed so that the ratio of execution differs depending on the set value. You may do it.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is 2 or 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In this feature unit 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and first) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 099IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect if the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, it may be possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it may be possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 8-26 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute a customer waiting demo effect including execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 012IWS516).

Step 012 When the process of IWS516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer waiting demo effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 012IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the operation is performed. The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) It may be possible to store information indicating (a mode of effect at the time of execution) and perform an effect of estimating a set value from these information and notifying the user. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or the estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 012IWS508 to 012IWS515. Further, the process of step 012IWS516 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, to give an motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of this feature unit 099IW, for example, the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). You may. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 099IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and at the end of the game, the image display device 5 displays the execution history information in a two-dimensional manner as described later. It may be configured to display a code or the like. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the setting value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the game end operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS517). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it is detected that the game end option is selected and the determination operation is performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. .. If it is detected that the game end operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts log information from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14, and the extracted log. A two-dimensional code including information (for example, log information of a probability change failure date and time described later) is generated (step 012IWS518). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to display the generated two-dimensional code on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS519), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

Although the feature unit 099IW describes that the operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not directly input the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. More specifically, first, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input on the first effect control CPU012IW120a side, and the second effect control CPU012IW120b goes through the first effect control CPU012IW120a. Enter a command indicating that the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been operated. This also applies to other similar description points in the feature section 099IW.

(Variable display start setting process)
8-27 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 012IWS601). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays the decorative symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step 012IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). (Stop symbol) is determined (step 012IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 012IWS602 by the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the display result (decorative pattern) of the variable display of the identification information according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. The display result determination means for determining the stop symbol) is realized. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 012IWS602, the second staging control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. May be good.

In step 012IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the second staging control CPU012IW120b determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. .. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), the second staging control CPU012IW120b is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same even symbols as stop symbols. To decide.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the second effect control CPU012IW120b uses a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. decide. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the second staging control CPU012IW120b has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 012IWS602. In this way, the combination of the jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined.

The second effect control CPU012IW120b extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and stops the decorative symbol using a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Determine the design. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 012IWS603). In the feature unit 099IW, the value of the fluctuation count counter is reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the fluctuation count counter is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. It is assumed that the value starts from the state of 0.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the in-game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS604).

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b selects the process table according to the in-game suggestion effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the in-game suggestion effect are determined (step 012IWS605). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 012IWS606).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The second effect control CPU012IW120b refers to the process table and controls to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 012IW121b of the second staging control board 012IW12b. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, when the execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 012IWS604, the process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 012IWS605, and step 012IWS607 is selected according to the selected process table. And by executing the variable display during effect process (step S172), the in-game suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, the second staging control CPU012IW120b is a staging device (image display device 5 as a staging component, staging component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as staging parts) is executed (step 012IWS607).

In this feature unit 099IW, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the second effect control CPU012IW120b , The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern command.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 012IWS608). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 012IWS609), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 8-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process (step 012IWS604) during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the second effect control CPU012IW120b is in the special period (Y in step 012IWS701), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS702), and during the special period. If not (N in step 012IWS701), the second gaming suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special period is in progress in step 012IWS701.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 012IWS705).

FIG. 8-29 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 8-29 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that. That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), the highly reliable in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS706). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". (Step 012IWS707).

Steps 012 By executing the processes of IWS706 to S707, the feature unit 099IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), for the set value "1", the ratio of determining to execute the suggestion effect during the game is low, and the ratio determined to be the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest, and it may not be determined as the third effect mode. By making such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the staging mode A, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 012IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS709).

FIG. 8-29 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-29 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS708 to S709, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 099IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is restricted not to be executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 012IWS708, the feature unit 099IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is 2 or 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 099IW, the in-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the in-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 099IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game of a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but is not limited to such a configuration. , Different aspects of the suggestion effect during the game may be feasible. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 099IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect during the game is executed and the effect mode when the effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Alternatively, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the rate at which the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. It may be set to be high, or the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the rate when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of performing the suggestion effect during the game, or the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Production decision processing during big hit)
FIG. 8-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit medium effect determination process. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 012IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

In step S012IWS902, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the first is shown in FIG. 8-31 (A). One big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the customer waiting demo production is finished. Further, in this feature unit 099IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode differ depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the jackpot suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 099IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 099IW, when the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 012IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed by the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), after the decorative symbol to be a big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, the figure is shown. As shown in 8-44 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 012IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS903). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is "1". (Step 012IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

Steps 012 By executing the processes of IWS903 to S904, the feature unit 099IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode, and the player is disappointed. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the staging mode A, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 012IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

FIG. 8-31 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 8-31 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and it may not be determined to be the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS905 to S906, a disadvantageous set value is set in the feature unit 099IW when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 012IWS905, the feature unit 099IW does not execute the jackpot suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the big hit middle suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), the rate at which the jackpot suggestion effect is not executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the rate at which the suggestion effect is not executed differs depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in this feature unit 099IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect is executed reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or the advance notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 099IW, it is possible to execute the big hit middle suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit medium suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 012IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 012IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B2), the movable member 012IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 8-43 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 has a big hit suggestion effect. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In this feature unit 099IW, since the jackpot suggestion effect and the character effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 012IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is a jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 012IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 012IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 012IWS907, by using the character effect effect determination table shown in FIGS. 8-31 (D), the character effect effect is not executed when the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 012IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the jackpot suggestion effect), or the jackpot is hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by reducing the execution ratio of the character effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), and the character effect may be executed at a low rate even when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the light guide plate effect is present (step 012IWS909) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 012IWS908).

Here, a light guide plate 012IW103 having a light transmissive property capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so as to allow light to enter from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 012IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 012IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 012IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by causing the light emitting body to emit light, it is possible to perform a light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Character appears. Further, during the execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In step 012IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when the effect is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 012IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the game's interest due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the jackpot suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Ending production processing)
8-32 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the ending effect processing, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 012IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot middle effect process (see step S176). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 012IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 012IWS953), and the effect device (image display) according to the contents of the process data n. A process for controlling the device 5, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 012IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the big hit or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 012IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 012IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 012IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot (step 012IW958). Whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (N in step 012IW958), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961 as it is.

If the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is terminated (Y in step 012IWS958), the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the V prize designation command has been received (step 012IWS959). If the V prize designation command has been received (Y in step 012IWS959), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961 as it is.

If the V prize designation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS959), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the probability change failure date and time to back up the backup memory board 099IW14. Log information is stored in the log area provided in the data memory 099IW210A to 210D (step 012IWS960). That is, in this case, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled by the big hit game based on the probabilistic big hit, and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period of time (29.5 seconds in this example). Since the game ball does not win in the V winning area in the special variable winning device 012IW007b and is not controlled to the probability change state, the log information is recorded as the probability change failure date and time. Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

After that, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 012IWS961), and ends the ending effect process.

In this example, the case where the probability change failure is detected and the log information is recorded in the ending period at the end of the big hit game is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is released in the fourth round during the jackpot game, at the end of the fourth round (when the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is closed after the fourth round). Or, even if it is configured to detect whether or not the probability change is not established and record the log information during the 5th round after the 4th round (during the opening of the 2nd special variable winning device 012IW007b of the 5th round). good.

(Error notification processing)
8-33 to 8-36 are flowcharts showing the error notification process (step 012IWS210). In the error notification process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the first left-handed notification in progress flag indicating that the first left-handed notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS101). If the first left-handed notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the second left-handed notification flag indicating that the second left-handed notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS102).

If the second left-handed notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (step 012IWS103). Whether or not the big hit game is in progress means that, for example, the value of the effect process flag updated in the effect control process process is a value indicating the big hit middle effect process (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is present. If the jackpot game is not in progress, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is in the high base state (step 012IWS104). To determine whether or not the system is in the high base state, for example, check whether or not a command that can identify the state in the high base state (for example, a probabilistic state background specification command or a time saving state background specification command) has been received. It can be determined by doing.

If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the gate passage designation command has been received (step 012IWS105). If the gate passage designation command is received (that is, if the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b counts the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 012IW041. The value of the gate passage counter for the purpose is added by 1 (step 012IWS106), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after the addition is 5 (step 012IWS107).

If the value of the gate passage counter is 5, the second staging control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the left-handed notification display (step 012IWS108). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying characters such as "Aim at the left!". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS109). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first left-handed notification (step). 012IWS110). That is, in this case, since the player is in the low base state and is not in the big hit game, the left-handed operation is originally performed. Since the fact that the detection is performed 5 times means that the right-handed operation is being performed, the first left-handed notification is performed to urge the player to perform the left-handed operation.

If the value of the gate passage counter after addition is not 5, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 10 (step 012IWS111). If the value of the gate passage counter is 10, the second staging control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the left-handed notification display (step 012IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying characters such as "Aim at the left!". In this case, for example, it may be configured to display a large-sized left-handed notification display as compared with the case where the first left-handed notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS113). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS114). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second left-handed notification in-progress flag (step 012IWS115). Further, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second left-handed notification (step). 012IWS116). That is, in this case, when the base is low and the game is not a big hit, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is detected 10 times in total. Therefore, the second left-handed notification is performed to urge the player to perform the left-handed operation. If the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set, the first left-handed notification flag and the first left-handed notification timer are reset.

In this example, the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is detected 10 times in total, whereas the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is satisfied. Since the execution condition of the first left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage is detected five times in total, the second left-handed notification is based on the fact that the execution conditions of the two first left-handed notifications are satisfied. The execution condition is satisfied.

Further, in this example, it is assumed that the execution condition of the left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is detected 5 times or 10 times in total. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is provided in the right area of the game ball, if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening is detected even once, the execution condition of the left-handed notification is satisfied. It may be configured to execute left-handed notification.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the left-handed notification date and time, and the log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Is stored (step 012IWS117). As described above, in this example, there are two types of left-handed notification, the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification, but the log is only performed when the second left-handed notification, which is more important, is executed. Log information is not recorded when recording in information and executing the first left-handed notification of low importance.

If the gate passage designation command has not been received (N of step 012IWS105, that is, if the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 has been detected, has the second staging control CPU 012IW120b received the winning opening winning designation command? It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS118). If the winning opening winning designation command is received (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected), the second staging control CPU012IW120b The value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, the fact that the winning opening winning designation command is received means that the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 provided in the left area of the gaming area. Is detected, and the player is performing a left-handed operation, so the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0.

Further, even when the jackpot game is in progress (Y in step 012IWS103) or in the high base state (Y in step 012IWS104), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS119, and the gate passage counter Clear the value to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, since the fact that the jackpot game is in progress or the high base state is in the case of performing a right-handed operation, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0.

When the first left-handed notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS101), that is, when the first left-handed notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs the first left-handed notification. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS120). If the first left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS121). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS122).

When the second left-handed notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS102), that is, when the second left-handed notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is notified of the second left-handed. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS123). If the second left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS124). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS125), and also controls to end the output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS126). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS127). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS128).

In this example, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected, the jackpot game is in progress, the high base state is in effect, and the notification period (33 seconds) of the second left-handed notification is determined. Although the case where the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the lapse of time is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10, the big hit game, and the high base state, while the second. The value of the gate passage counter may not be cleared even after the notification period (33 seconds) of the left-handed notification has elapsed, and various processing modes can be considered.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first full tank notification flag indicating that the first full tank notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS129). If the first full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the second full tank notification flag indicating that the second full tank notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS130).

If the second full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the full tank detection command has been received (step 012IWS131). If the full tank detection command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the full tank flag indicating that the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is being detected is set. Confirm (step 012IWS132). If the full tank flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the full tank flag (step 012IWS133) and measures the duration of the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate). Set the full tank timer (step 012IWS134).

If the full tank flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (step 012IWS135). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (that is, if the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is in a full tank state for 10 seconds), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS136). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying characters such as "The lower plate is full!". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS137). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first full tank notification (step). 012IWS138).

If the value of the full tank timer is not a value corresponding to 10 seconds, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (step 012IWS139). ). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (that is, if the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is in a full tank state for 30 seconds), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS140). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying characters such as "The lower plate is full!". In this case, for example, it may be configured to display a large-sized full tank notification display as compared with the case where the first full tank notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS141). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS142). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS143). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second full tank notification (step). 012IWS144). If the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set, the first full tank notification flag and the first full tank notification timer are reset.

In this example, when the second full tank notification is executed, the case where all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 and the output of the predetermined notification sound are executed is shown as in the case where the second left-handed notification is executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute either all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 or the output of a predetermined notification sound, or may be configured to light only a part of the game effect lamp 9. good.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is set as the full tank notification date and time, and the log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Is stored (step 012IWS145). As described above, in this example, there are two types of full tank notification, the first full tank notification and the second full tank notification, but the log is only performed when the second full tank notification, which is more important, is executed. Log information is not recorded when recording in the information and executing the first full tank notification of low importance.

On the other hand, if the full tank detection command has not been received (N in step 012IWS131), that is, if the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has not been detected, the second effect control CPU012IW120b should be set. For example, the full tank flag is reset and the full tank timer is reset (step 012IWS146).

When the first full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS129), that is, when the first full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is notified of the first full tank. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS147). If the first full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the full tank notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS148). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS149).

When the second full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS130), that is, when the second full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is notified of the second full tank. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS150). If the second full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS151). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS152), and also controls to end the output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS153). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS154). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the full tank flag and resets the full tank timer (step 012IWS155).

(Maintenance mode processing)
FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing the maintenance mode process (step 012IWS211). In the maintenance mode process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode in-progress flag indicating that the maintenance mode is in progress is set (step 012IWS451). If the maintenance mode flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting checking flag indicating that the setting is being checked is set (step 012IWS452).

If the setting confirmation flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS453). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the setting confirmation display (step 012IWS454). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying a character display such as "setting is being confirmed". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS455).

If the setting confirmation flag is set (Y in step 012IWS452), is the push button 31B turned on in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (specifically, the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input). (Whether or not) is confirmed (step 012IWS456). If the push button 31B is turned on, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen (step 012IWS457). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS458).

As described above, by executing the processes of steps 012IWS452 to S458, in this example, maintenance is performed based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed while the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. It is controlled by the mode, and the display of the maintenance mode menu screen is started.

If the push button 31B is not turned on (N in step 012IWS456), the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS459). If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the setting confirmation display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS460). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS461). That is, the fact that the recovery command is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation process is completed (see N in step 012IWS043 and step 012IWS049). Controls to end the display of the confirmation display.

If the maintenance mode flag is set (Y in step 012IWS451), the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS462). .. For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all the log information from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step). 012IWS463). Strictly speaking, in step 012IWS463, only the log information for the game store is read, and the log information for the game machine maker is not read. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the maintenance history screen including the extracted log information as the history information (step 012IWS464).

If the maintenance history selection operation is not detected (N in step 012IWS462), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed by the player (n). Step 012IWS465). For example, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has log information stored in the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Of these, all the log information for setting change and setting confirmation is extracted (step 012IWS466). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the setting change / confirmation history screen including the extracted setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information (step 012IWS467).

If it is not detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed (N in step 012IWS465), the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS468). .. If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to delete the maintenance mode menu screen, the maintenance history screen, and the setting change / confirmation history screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS469). .. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS470). That is, the fact that the recovery command is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation process is completed (see N in step 012IWS043 and step 012IWS049). Controls to end the mode.

In this example, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the recovery command, and the maintenance mode is terminated, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off, the setting value command is also transmitted (see step 012IWS047). Therefore, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the setting value command, and the maintenance mode is used. May be configured to terminate.

(Setting change time recording process)
FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart showing the setting change time recording process (step 012IWS212). In the setting change time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS801). If the setting change command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is set as the setting change start date and time in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Log information is stored in the provided log area (step 012IWS802). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a setting change command reception flag indicating that the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS803).

If the setting change command has not been received (N in step 012IWS801), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS804). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the setting confirmation start date and time in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Log information is stored in the provided log area (step 012IWS805). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a setting confirmation command reception flag indicating that the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS806).

If the setting confirmation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS804), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command has been received (step 012IWS807). If the initialization designation command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting change command reception flag is set (step 012IWS808). If the setting change command reception flag is not set (that is, when the setting change process is not executed and only the initialization process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Is input, and the input date and time information is set as the RAM clear date and time, and the log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS809).

On the other hand, if the setting change command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS808), that is, when both the setting change processing and the initialization processing are executed, the second staging control CPU012IW120b stores the setting value of the RAM012IW122b. Read the current setting value stored in the area (step 012IWS810). In this example, when the setting change process is executed, the setting value command is transmitted before the initialization specification command (see steps 012IWS047 and S052), so that the setting value storage area of RAM012IW122b is the latest. The setting value of should be stored. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates the input date and time information with the read setting value, and uses the input date and time information as the setting change end date and time as the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The log information is stored in the log area provided in (step 012IWS811). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the set setting change command reception flag.

In this example, by executing the process of steps 012IWS810 and S811, if the setting change process is executed, the initialization process should also be executed, but only the log information related to the setting change is recorded. However, by omitting the recording of the log information related to the RAM clear, it is possible to prevent the log information from being unnecessarily recorded.

If the initialization command has not been received (N in step 012IWS807), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS812). If the recovery command has been received, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command reception flag is set (step 012IWS813). If the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS813), that is, when both the setting confirmation process and the recovery process are executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Read the current setting value stored in (step 012IWS814). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates the input date and time information with the read setting value, and uses the input date and time information as the setting confirmation end date and time as the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The log information is stored in the log area provided in (step 012IWS815). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the set setting confirmation command reception flag.

In this example, when the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed, the case where the log information is not recorded is shown, but the log information may be recorded. In this case, for example, when the time is N in step 012IWS813, the date and time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information is used as the recovery date and time to log to the log area provided in the backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. It may be configured to store information.

(Current time setting process)
FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart showing the current time setting process (step 012IWS213). In the current time setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode in-progress flag is set (step 012IWS821). If the maintenance mode flag is set (that is, if the maintenance mode is in progress), whether or not the current time setting flag indicating that the current time is being set is set in the second effect control CPU012IW120b. (Step 012IWS822).

If the current time setting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS823). For example, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the current time setting screen (step 012IWS824). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the current time setting flag (step 012IWS825).

If the current time setting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS822), the waiting flag indicating that the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is waiting for recording the log information of the current time setting is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 012IWS826). If the waiting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the time signal has been received from the first effect control CPU012IW120a (step 012IWS827).

In this example, as already described, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU012IW120a, so that the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. When the current time setting information is input, a signal capable of specifying the input current time setting information is sequentially transmitted from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. In this case, in this example, the hour signal indicating the hour, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week are used. It is transmitted in the order of the indicated day signal. Further, in this example, as described above, in the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms, and these signals are transmitted every 10 ms.

If the time signal is received (Y in step 012IWS827), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 when it is indicated by the time signal (step 012IWS828). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 500 ms in the waiting timer for measuring the waiting period until the log information of the current time setting is recorded (step 012IWS829). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the standby flag (step 012IWS830).

If the waiting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS826), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the waiting timer has timed out (step 012IWS831). If the standby timer has not timed out, has the second effect control CPU012IW120b received any of a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, or a day of the week signal from the first effect control CPU012IW120a? Confirm whether or not (step 012IWS832).

If any signal is received (Y in step 012IWS832), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the information indicated by the received signal (step 012IWS833). For example, when a minute signal is received, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the minute indicated by the received minute signal. Further, for example, when a second signal is received, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the second indicated by the received second signal. Further, for example, when a year signal is received, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the year indicated by the received year signal. Further, for example, when the moon signal is received, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the month indicated by the received moon signal. Further, for example, when the day signal is received, the day information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day indicated by the received day signal. Further, for example, when the day of the week signal is received, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day of the week indicated by the received day of the week signal.

If the standby timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS831), that is, if 500 ms have elapsed since the first time signal was received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has the hour, minute, and hour from the real-time clock 012IW126. Read the date and time information for seconds, year, month, day, and day of the week (step 012IWS834). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 using these read date and time information as the time setting date and time (step 012IWS835). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the current time setting flag and the standby flag (step 012IWS836).

FIG. 8-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting timing of the current time. When the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to set the current time, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-40, the hour signal, the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal are used for the first staging control every 10 ms according to the setting operation by the player. It is sequentially transmitted from the CPU012IW120a to the second effect control CPU012IW120b.

Upon receiving these signals, the second staging control CPU 012IW120b immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the received signals, as shown in FIGS. 8-40. As shown in FIG. 8-40, when the time signal is received, the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received time signal. Further, when the minute signal is received 10 ms later, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received minute signal. Further, when the second signal is received 10 ms later, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received second signal. Further, when the year signal is received 10 ms later, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received year signal. Further, when the moon signal is received 10 ms later, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received moon signal. Further, when the day signal is received 10 ms later, the day information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received day signal. Further, when the day of the week signal is received 10 ms later, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received day of the week signal.

On the other hand, the log information of the time setting date and time is not recorded immediately, the waiting timer is set when the first hour signal is received, the waiting timer times out, and as shown in FIG. 8-40, the hour. After waiting for 500 ms to elapse after receiving the signal, the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 is read and recorded in the log information as the time setting date and time.

If the player further sets the current time before 500 ms has elapsed after receiving the hour signal, another hour signal, minute signal, second signal, etc. may be performed before 500 ms elapses. The information of the real-time clock 012IW126 may be set by receiving the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day signal, but in this example, the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set at any time for each reception of these signals. Therefore, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 set based on the last received signal.

If the log information of the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day signal transmitted individually is recorded as log information, the log information of the current time setting becomes more redundant than necessary. However, in this example, as shown in Fig. 8-40, it is configured to wait until all signals related to time setting are received before recording the log information of the time setting date and time. It prevents it from becoming redundant.

In this example, in addition to the second staging control CPU012IW120b, the first staging control CPU012IW120a to which the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are temporarily input is provided. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an input circuit for inputting detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B is provided, and hour signals, minute signals, second signals, year signals, month signals, day signals, and day signals are sequentially output from the input circuits. It may be configured to be transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. Any signal may be configured to be sequentially transmitted to the second staging control CPU012IW120b in such a form as a signal corresponding to the operation.

Further, in this example, the case where the real-time clock 012IW126 is mounted on the second staging control board 012IW12b side is shown, but the real-time clock is configured to be mounted on the first staging control board 012IW12a side for the operation of the player. Accordingly, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a may be configured to update the date and time information of the real-time clock at any time. Then, the first effect control CPU012IW120a transmits the updated real-time clock date / time information to the second effect control CPU012IW120b, and the second effect control CPU012IW120b updates the counter or the like based on the received date / time information. May be configured to manage.

(Recording of power failure date and time)
FIG. 8-41 is a flowchart showing the power interruption date / time recording process (step 012IWS214). In the power interruption date / time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the temporary storage enable flag indicating that the temporary storage of the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 is permitted is set (step 012IWS841). ). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 has timed out ( Step 012IWS842). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the read date and time information in the temporary area provided in the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS843). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

The date and time information is stored in the temporary area of RAM012IW122b every 100 ms, but when the previous date and time information is stored in the temporary area, new date and time information is temporarily overwritten every 100 ms. It shall be stored in the area.

If the temporary storage enable flag is not set (N in step 012IWS841), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has received the initialization designation command or the recovery command (step 012IWS845). If the initialization specification command or the recovery command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b will use the log information of the previous power-on date and time in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. It is confirmed whether or not is stored (step 012IWS846). If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is not stored (N in step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the second effect control CPU012IW120b reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b, and cuts off the read date and time information. Log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the date and time (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

If neither the initialization specification command nor the recovery command is received (N in step 012IWS845), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is powered on by other commands (however, the setting confirmation command and the setting change command are turned on). It is confirmed whether or not the command (excluding the command sometimes transmitted) has been received (step 012IWS848). If other commands are received, for example, if a fluctuation pattern command, a display result specification command, or the like is received, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

In step 012IWS849, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the temporary storage enable flag (step 012IWS849). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

When the temporary storage flag is set in step 012IWS849, the temporary storage flag is maintained until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped or the system reset of the second staging control CPU 012IW120b occurs. Then, when the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8-18 is started due to a power-on to the gaming machine, a system reset, or the like, the process is reset by the initialization process of step 012IWS201.

FIG. 8-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the power failure date and time. As shown in FIG. 8-42, when the second staging control CPU012IW120b is running, the second staging control CPU012IW120b is determined to be Y in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date / time recording process, and steps 012IWS842 to S844. By executing the process of, the date and time information is temporarily stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the initialization process (see step 012IWS201) is executed and the temporary storage enable flag is reset, the second effect control is performed. Even if the CPU 012IW120b for CPU 012IW120b returns to the activated state, it is determined to be N in step 012IWS841 of the power failure date / time recording process, the temporary storage of the date / time information every 100 ms is not executed, and it is finally stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b. Date and time information is maintained.

If the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then the power supply to the gaming machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (1), the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read and the read date and time on condition that the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received. The log information is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 with the information as the power failure date and time (see Y in step 012IWS845 and step 012IWS847). Then, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012IWS203), but when the log information of the power-on date and time before the occurrence of the power failure is not recorded. In this case, the log information of the power failure date and time is not recorded (see N in step 012IWS846).

On the other hand, if the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs, the power supply of the gaming machine itself is not stopped, and the initialization designation command, the recovery command, etc. from the gaming control microcomputer 100, etc. No power-on command is sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (2), if the initialization designation command or the recovery command is not received, it is determined that the power failure of the gaming machine itself has not occurred. Then, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is controlled so as not to record the log information as the power failure date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (2), for example, based on the reception of other commands (excluding commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation command and a setting change command), for example. The temporary storage enable flag is set based on the reception of the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, and the like, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850).

If the log information of the power failure date and time is recorded only based on the detection of the stop on the second staging control CPU012IW120b, the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs (the first). (When the power supply of the second staging control CPU012IW120b is temporarily stopped due to a system reset of the staging control CPU012IW120b), the log information of the power failure date and time is also recorded, and the game is played. There is a possibility that the log information of the power failure date and time will be recorded even though the power failure of the machine itself has not occurred. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-42, the date and time when the second staging control CPU012IW120b is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power failure date and time, and an initialization specification command, a recovery command, etc. It is configured to officially record the log information of the power failure date and time on the condition that the command at the time of turning on the power is received, so that such a situation does not occur.

In this example, on the condition that the initialization specification command or the recovery command is received, it is determined that the gaming machine itself has been disconnected and the date and time of the interruption is recorded in the log information. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to record the power failure date and time in the log information based on the reception of another command transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation command or a setting change command. Further, in the process of step 099IWS001 of the staging control main process, it may be determined that the power cutoff of the gaming machine itself has occurred based on the input of the power supply cutoff signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127.

Next, a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode will be described. 8-45 to 8-48 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode. In FIGS. 8-45 to 8-48, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

First, a specific example of the display screen when the maintenance history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46. When the setting confirmation command is received when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, a character display such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-45 (A). , The setting confirmation display is started (see steps 012IWS453 to S455). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (A), when the setting confirmation display is being displayed, a character display such as "press the push button to shift to the maintenance mode" is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed, and a display prompting the operation to shift to the maintenance mode is displayed.

Next, when the player presses the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (B), the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the mode shifts to the maintenance mode (see steps 012IWS456 to S458). As shown in FIG. 8-45 (B), the maintenance mode menu screen displays the options of "maintenance history", "setting change / confirmation history", and "current time setting", and the current time is set. It is displayed.

When the option 012IW106 of the “maintenance history” is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45 (C). As shown in FIGS. 8-45 (C), on the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be higher. In the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (C), an illegal winning error indicating that an illegal winning is detected in a winning opening such as the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening, the first count switch 012IW023a or the second count The log information of the switch abnormality error indicating that the abnormality of various switches such as the switch 012IW023b is detected, the prize ball error indicating that the prize ball abnormality is detected, and the magnet error indicating that the abnormal magnetism is detected is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (C), the log information indicating that the probability change failure is detected is also displayed (see steps 012IWS958 to S960).

Further, when there are a plurality of pages of the maintenance history screen, when the selection operation of the next page is performed, the process shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D). In the example shown in FIGS. 8-45 (D), the log information of the start of the setting change and the end of the setting change (see steps 012IWS802 and S811), and the log information of the power-off date and time and the power-on date and time are displayed (step). 012IWS203, S847). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45 (D), the log information of the left-handed notification and the full tank notification is also displayed (see steps 012IWS117 and S145).

If there is a next page, selecting the next page will move to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), and then the next page will be displayed. When the selection operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (F), the process shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-46 (E), the log information of the start of the setting confirmation and the end of the setting confirmation is displayed (see steps 012IWS805 and S815), and the current time is set during the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation. Log information to that effect is also displayed (see step 012IWS835).

In this example, when the current time is set, the date and time information after the setting is read and the log information is recorded, so that the date and time may be inconsistent before and after the current time is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the setting confirmation was started at 09:36:28 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, whereas the current time was set. It is set to 09:36:16 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, and the time is earlier than the start of the setting confirmation. As described above, in this example, even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, as shown in FIGS. 8-46 (E). The log information is displayed in the order in which the log information was generated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46 (F), the log information of the RWM abnormality error (see steps 012IWS017 to S020) indicating that some RAM abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on to the gaming machine is displayed. Then, since the RWM abnormality error occurred, the game clerk once stopped the power supply of the game machine, then turned on the power again while turning on the clear switch, and as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the initial stage. Log information indicating that the conversion process has been executed is also displayed (see step IWS809).

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-47. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-47 (A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-47 (B), and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed. It is assumed that the option 012IW107 of "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and operated during the display.

When the option 012IW107 of the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. 8-47 (C). As shown in FIG. 8-47 (C), on the setting change / confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other. And the latest log information is displayed in order so that it is ranked higher.

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the selection operation of the current time setting is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-48. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 8-48 (A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-48 (B), and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed. It is assumed that the option 012IW108 of the "current time setting" is selected and operated during the display.

When the option 012IW108 of the "current time setting" is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the current time setting screen as shown in FIG. 8-48 (C). As shown in FIGS. 8-48 (C) and 8-48 (D), the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second item is selected by tilting the stick controller 31A to the left or right, and the stick is displayed. A number for each item is selected by tilting the controller 31A back and forth. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 8-48 (C), when it is desired to change the time from 16 to 15, the stick controller 31A is tilted to the right four times to move to the time item, and the stick controller 31A is moved. It suffices to change from "16" to "15" by tilting once in the forward direction (toward the player). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-48 (D), when the player presses the push button 31B, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

In the feature unit 099IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. Further, when a predetermined effect that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. May give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 099IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, at the start of the first fluctuation after changing the setting, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal time. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the ratio of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 099IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the character effect effect and the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is made to the player. For example, when an even initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of performing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect of displaying characters and pictures by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, and includes a control to output a predetermined sound, a control to vibrate the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control to emit a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By doing so, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or less noticeable).

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 099IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power and the real-time clock 012IW126) is executed in a specific mode. This may suggest a setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold storage becoming 0 or the number of times when a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold storage number occurs. Display control, output control of predetermined sound, light emission control of predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined sound). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 099IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, the feature unit 099IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 012IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 8-49 (A) and 8-49 (B), a security cover 012IW500B composed of a short piece 012IW500Ba and a long piece 012IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 012IW201. The right end of the long piece 012IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 012IW201, and is set via the through port 012IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 012IW500Bb. The key 012IW051 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500B (long piece 012IW500Bb) slides in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 012IW201 with the setting key 012IW051 covered. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released by sliding the security cover 012IW500B to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered. It can be changed from the regulated state to a state where it can be released (it can be changed to a permissible state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-49 (A) and 8-49 (B), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the protrusion dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 012IW500B with respect to the board case 012IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-50 (A), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 012IW500B has a protrusion dimension from the substrate case 012IW201. By sliding the pachinko game machine 1 with respect to the board case 012IW201 until the length becomes L2 (the pachinko game machine 1 is allowed), the clerk of the game hall or the like operates the setting key 012IW051 to set the pachinko game machine 1. Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 8-50 (B), the security cover 012IW500B is attached to the board case 012IW201 until the protrusion dimension from the board case 012IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500B will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the security cover 012IW500B covers the setting key 012IW051. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being forgotten, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 012IW001a and the gaming machine frame 012IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 012IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the setting key 012IW051 is maintained by the security cover 012IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side, as a modification 2, as shown in FIGS. 8-51 (A) and 8-51 (B), the left end portion of the security cover 012IW500C is provided on the gaming machine. Between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and the uncovering position rotated from the covering position around the pivot axis 012IW500Cd facing in the vertical direction provided on the back side of the frame 012IW003. It may be rotatably supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 012IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 012IW001a, and the long piece 012IW500Cb sets the setting key 012IW051 on the back side. The rotation from the covered state to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 012IW051. It should be possible to operate it. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the pachinko gaming machine is restricted from rotating while the security cover 012IW500C (long piece 012IW500Cb) covers the setting key 012IW051. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 012IW051. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to an allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (A), the security cover 012IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 012IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (B), the security cover 012IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 012IW500C. If the 012IW051 is not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, since it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, the security cover 012IW500C covers the setting key 012IW051. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being forgotten, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, the feature unit 099IW exemplifies a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 012IW003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. By opening 012IW003a, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 8-53 (A) to 8-53 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through hole 012IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 012IW003 so that the setting key 012IW051 can be operated via the through port 012IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 012IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. ..

When the setting key 012IW051 can be operated via the through port 012IW003b, a door body 012IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 012IW003b is provided, and when the door body 012IW003c is closed, the setting key 012IW051 is used. The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 8-53 (B) and 8-53 (C), when the door body 012IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 012IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 012IW003a. Since the 012IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 012IW003a and the game machine frame 012IW003 so that it can be opened and closed, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 012IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed. And can improve security.

(Modification example 4)
Further, the information that can be recorded as log information is not limited to the information shown by the feature unit 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-54 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modified example 4. In the fourth modification, information indicating unsuccessful setting suggestion or “unsuccessful point grant” is recorded as log information, and a case is shown in which the information is configured to be displayable on the maintenance history screen. The log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" is a reason such as the player does not perform an operation or the operation means fails even though the execution condition of the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the current setting value is satisfied. This is log information indicating that the set value suggestion effect is not executed or the set value suggestion effect with low suggestion accuracy is executed. Further, the log information 012IW109b of "successful point granting" is not operated by the player even though the conditions for granting points necessary for customizing the display screen of the image display device 5 and acquiring image contents are satisfied. This is log information indicating that points were not given due to reasons such as a failure of the operating means. In this way, it may be configured to allow the benefit related to the production or the benefit related to the content to be given in some form and to record the log information thereof.

(Modification 5)
Further, the information that can be recorded as log information is not limited to the information shown by the feature unit 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modified example 5. In the fifth modification, a case is shown in which the log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred is configured to be displayable on the maintenance history screen. In the configuration of the feature unit 099IW, the log information indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred is stored only in the second log area, so that it is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen, for example. , This log information is stored in both the first log area and the second log area, and in addition to the log information recorded in the first log area, the log information recorded in the second log area. This can be realized by configuring a part of (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) to be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a distribution device for alternately distributing game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, five) is continuously assigned to either one of the starting winning openings. ) May be detected as a start port unit error error, recorded in the log information, and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, a vibration error indicating that an abnormal vibration in a game machine has been detected or a radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave has been detected may be recorded as log information and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Often, various forms of log information are conceivable.

As described above, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is mounted on a power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and a first control means (for example, a main board 11) that receives power from the power supply means for control. The game control microcomputer 100) and the second control means (for example, the second effect control board 012IW12b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) that receives power from the power supply means and controls based on the instruction information from the first control means. The effect control CPU012IW120b) and the monitoring means (for example, the monitoring means supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b) that monitors the power supply supplied to the second control means and notifies the second control means, and the power supply voltage is increased. When the value is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is provided with a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply cutoff signal, and the second control means is a monitoring means at the start of control. (For example, if a power cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, waits for the start of control until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped. The part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002. On the other hand, when the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 does not input the power supply cutoff signal at the start of control, the control waits for the start. The log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area. The part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processes of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003). With such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the power supply means (for example, the power supply board) and the first control means (for example, for game control mounted on the main board 11) that receives power from the power supply means and performs the first control. The microcomputer 100), the second control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) and the second control means that receive power from the power source means to perform the second control. When the monitoring means for monitoring the supplied power supply and notifying the second control means (for example, monitoring the power supply supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b and the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V)). , The power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply cutoff signal to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and the first control means can specify that the power is supplied and the first control is started (instruction information (). For example, a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization specification command, and other commands at power-on are notified to the second control means, and the second control means determines the power supply voltage of the power supply to be supplied at the start of control. When the monitoring means notifies that the value has changed from less than the value to more than the predetermined value, it is specified that at least the first control means and the second control means have restarted, and based on the instruction information from the first control means. The second control is started (for example, when the power supply cutoff signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the time of starting the control, the setting change command or , Setting confirmation command, initialization specification command, and other power-on commands. The second effect control CPU012IW120b executes processing such as steps 099IWS001, 099IWS002, 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, and 012IWS809. ), When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than the predetermined value at the start of control, it is specified that only the second control means has restarted, and the second control is started (). For example, when the power supply cutoff signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b without waiting for the start of control. Is stored in the log area. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b processes steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003. The part that executes the reason). With such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a power supply means (for example, a power supply board) and a first control means (for example, a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board 11) for controlling by receiving power supply from the power supply means. 100) and a second control means (for example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) that receives power from the power source means and controls based on the instruction information from the first control means). And the monitoring means that monitors the power supply supplied to the second control means and notifies the second control means (for example, the power supply supplied to the second staging control board 012IW12b is monitored, and the power supply voltage is a predetermined value (for example,). When the voltage is less than + 8V), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is provided with a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127) that outputs a power supply cutoff signal, and the second control means responds to a notification from the monitoring means at the start of control. It has an output means that outputs information that can specify the activation history of the second control means (for example, when it is determined that a system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred, and a power failure of the game machine itself has occurred. By displaying different initial images from time to time, the startup history can be recognized. Further, the log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred is displayed on the maintenance history screen. (See FIGS. 8-55). For the log information recorded in the second log area, an inspection device is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the inspection device and the second effect control board 012IW12b are controlled by the second effect. (Read by inputting / receiving an inspection signal to / from the CPU 012IW120b). With such a configuration, the situation at the time of turning on the power can be confirmed, and the optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

The above-mentioned "first control means" and "second control means" are the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 and the second staging control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second staging control board 012IW12b. This feature unit is not limited to the combination with the second effect control board 012IW12b, but also the combination of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and the first effect control CPU012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. The configuration of 099IW is applicable. In this case, the power supply supplied to the first staging control board 012IW12a is monitored, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V), a power cutoff signal is output to the first staging control board 012IW12a. It suffices if a power supply monitoring circuit is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to start the process after the power is stably supplied to the first staging control board 012IW12a, and it is possible to specify the occurrence of a system reset in the first staging control board 012IW12a when the power is turned on. , Optimal processing can be executed according to the situation.

In this feature unit 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b are mounted in place of the staging control board 12 shown in FIG. 2. The configuration of the feature unit 099IW can also be applied to a gaming machine on which the main board 11 and the staging control board 12 shown in the above are mounted. In this case, a power supply monitoring circuit that monitors the power supplied to the staging control board 12 and outputs a power cutoff signal to the staging control board 12 when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V). It suffices if it is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to start the process after the power is stably supplied to the first staging control board 12, and it is possible to specify the occurrence of a system reset on the staging control board 12 when the power is turned on. Optimal processing can be executed according to the above.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second control means is used until the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, + 8V) (for example, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127). The control is not started until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped (for example, the portion where the second staging control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002). With such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a second control means is provided with storage means (for example, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to more than the predetermined value at the start of control (for example, a power cutoff signal is sent from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control. When the information has been input and then the input of the power off signal is stopped), predetermined information regarding startup based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the power on date and time, the setting change start date and time, and the setting confirmation start date and time). , RAM clear date and time, etc.) is stored in the storage means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes processing such as step 099IWS205, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, and step 012IWS809), and is supplied at the start of control. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the power supply is equal to or higher than the predetermined value, the predetermined image is displayed on the display means and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, the system of the second effect control board 012IW12b). When a reset or the like occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the process of step 099IWS204 is not executed, and a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization specification command, and other power-on commands are executed. It doesn't even receive, so it doesn't remember log information about them). With such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the storage means are a first storage means (for example, a first log area for recording log information for a game store) and a second storage means (for example, log information for a game machine maker). The second control means includes, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power source has changed from less than a predetermined value to a predetermined value or more at the start of control. Stores predetermined information regarding activation in the first storage means based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b may use step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809, or the like. When the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, it is possible to specify that only the second control means has restarted. Information (for example, log information including the system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of N in step 099IWS001 and step 099IWS003). With such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second control means has a first backup process for storing information related to control in the first storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the first log area) and control. It is possible to execute a second backup process (for example, a backup process for storing log information in a second log area) for storing information about information in a second storage means, and the first backup process stores one piece of information in one store. The information is stored in an area, and the second backup process stores one piece of information in a plurality of storage areas (see, for example, FIG. 8-19). With such a configuration, the optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the present feature unit 099IW, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player. Further, a storage area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information generated during the game is provided, and abnormal history information (for example, log information) related to the game can be identifiable and displayed, and the stored contents of the storage area can be displayed. Initialization processing for initialization (for example, RAM clear 1) can be executed, and when the initialization processing is executed, setting change processing for changing the setting value (for example, setting change processing) is executed. It is possible. Further, when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to identify and display that the initialization process has been executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-46 (E)). , RAM clear log information is displayed), When the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the setting change process is executed without displaying that it can be identified that the initialization process was executed. This can be specified and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (D), only the log information indicating the end of the setting change is displayed). Therefore, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from becoming difficult to confirm. That is, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, it is assumed that the initialization process is executed, but if the log information of the setting change is displayed, the initialization process is executed. Since it is self-evident, it is redundant to record and display the log information of the initialization process. Therefore, by preventing the log information of unnecessary initialization processing from being recorded and displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary recording of log information and prevent it from becoming difficult to confirm the history information.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to execute a setting confirmation process (for example, a setting confirmation process) for confirming a set value, and the movement of the player is detected during the execution of the setting confirmation process. Based on this, the history information can be displayed in a identifiable manner (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 to 8-48, based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed during the display of the setting confirmation display. The maintenance mode menu screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the game control means for controlling the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the control of the effect based on the information from the game control means. (For example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b) is provided. Further, the game control means can output initialization information (for example, an initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization process has been executed, and setting change information (for example, setting change information indicating that the setting change process is executed). , Setting change command) can be output. Further, the staging control means can display different history information identifiable depending on whether or not the initialization information and the setting change information are output (for example, the second staging control CPU012IW120b is an initialization designation command. And, based on receiving the setting change command, the log information of the setting change completion is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a history storage means (for example, backup data memory 099IW210A to 210D) capable of detecting a predetermined abnormality (for example, a left-handed notification state) and storing history information (for example, backup memory board 099IW14). The log area provided in the RAM 012IW122b) is provided. Further, a first abnormal state (for example, a first left-handed notification state) indicating that a predetermined abnormality has a predetermined importance, and a first indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a higher importance than the first abnormal state. 2 It is possible to detect an abnormal state (for example, a second left-handed notification state), and information indicating that the first abnormal state has been detected is not stored as history information, but information indicating that the second abnormal state has been detected. Can be stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the first abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state) and the second abnormality (for example, the second left-handed notification state) having a higher importance than the first abnormality are described. It is detectable. Further, it is provided with a history storage means (for example, a log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 and a log area of the RAM012IW122b) capable of storing abnormal history information related to the game, and the history storage means stores the information. It is possible to display the history information to be specified (for example, the maintenance history screen is displayed as shown in FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46). Further, when the second abnormality is detected, the information indicating that the second abnormality is detected is stored as history information, while when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the first abnormality is detected. The information indicating that the information has been sent is not stored as history information (for example, the log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs, and the log information is not recorded even when the first left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed. That is, since the storage capacity of log information is also limited, if it is recorded as log information before the first abnormality, which is less important, the history of necessary abnormalities may disappear at an early stage. In, since only the second and higher values with high importance are recorded, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second abnormality is detected according to the detection result of the first abnormality per unit period (for example, based on the fact that the execution condition of the first left-handed notification for two is satisfied. The execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied). Therefore, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

In this example, the case where the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied according to the number of times the execution condition of the first left-handed notification is satisfied is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the fact that the execution condition of the first left-handed notification continues for a predetermined period, it is determined that the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied, and the second left-handed notification is executed. May be good.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality has been detected and that the second abnormality has been detected (for example, the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification are executed). ). In this case, the detection of the first abnormality can be notified by a predetermined mode, and the detection of the second abnormality can be notified by a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, in the first left-handed notification). Only the left-handed notification display is displayed, and in the second left-handed notification, in addition to the left-handed notification display, all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output of the notification sound are output). Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the abnormality.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a plurality of types of first abnormality and second abnormality can be detected (for example, in addition to the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state, the first full tank notification is performed. Detects the status and the second full tank notification status). Further, the first abnormality and the second abnormality are detected according to the detection conditions different for each type of the first abnormality and the second abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state are sent to the passing gate 012IW041. In the first full tank notification state and the second full tank notification state, the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is 10 while the determination is made by detecting the passage of the game ball 5 or 10 times. Determined by whether it lasts for seconds or 30 seconds). Therefore, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

In this example, a case where a full tank notification is executed other than the left-handed notification is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to execute abnormal winning notification, magnet error notification, ball jam error notification, etc., and there are a first notification with low importance and a second notification with high importance, and the second notification is performed. It may be configured to record the log information only when it is executed and display it on the maintenance history screen.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, a predetermined control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) and a specific control means (for example, a specific control means) that controls based on information from the predetermined control means. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is provided. Further, the specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms). ), Information that can identify that the power supply output by the predetermined control means has started when the power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, initialization designation command, recovery command). Based on the input, the temporarily stored date and time can be stored as the power failure date and time (for example, the log information is stored in the log area as the power failure date and time). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time. That is, both when the power failure of the game machine itself occurs and when the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs, it is possible to prevent the situation where the power failure date and time are recorded as the power failure date and time. It can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, when the power supply to the specific control means is started and the information that can identify that the power supply is started cannot be input, the temporarily stored date and time is set as the power failure date and time. Do not store (for example, if the initialization specification command or the recovery command is not received, the log information is not stored in the log area as the power failure date and time). Therefore, it is possible to suitably store the power failure date and time.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the date and time can be temporarily stored at predetermined timings (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b). Therefore, it is possible to suitably store the power failure date and time.

In this example, the case where the date and time information is temporarily stored every 100 ms is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the current date and time information may be temporarily stored and stored as a temporary power cut date and time only when the stop of the second staging control CPU 012IW120b is detected.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is stopped based on the stop of the power supply to the specific control means (for example, the temporary storage enable flag is reset and the date and time every 100 ms). Temporary storage of information will not be executed). Then, based on the input of the predetermined information (for example, the initialization designation command, the recovery command, and other commands) output by the predetermined control means, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is restarted (for example). , The temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information is resumed every 100 ms). Therefore, it is possible to suitably store the power failure date and time.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the specific control means can store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, the power-on date and time is recorded as log information). If the date and time when the power supply is started is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the power-on date and time (for example, the log information of the power-on date and time before the power-off occurs is not recorded. Does not record the log information of the power failure date and time). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state. That is, since there is no record that the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is possible to prevent an abnormal state in which the date and time of the power failure is recorded.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the first control means (for example, the first staging control CPU012IW120a) and the second control means (for example, the second staging control) that controls based on the information from the first control means. CPU 012IW120b) is provided. Further, the first control means sequentially outputs a plurality of information regarding the change of the date and time to the second control means over a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the passage of 10 ms) (for example, an hour signal and a minute signal). , Second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day of the week signal in order). Further, the second control means stores the date and time change history after a specific period, which is a predetermined period or longer, has elapsed since the input of a part of the information regarding the date and time change (for example, FIG. 8-FIG. 8- As shown in 40, wait until 500 ms have elapsed after receiving the time signal, and then record it in the log information as the time setting date and time). Therefore, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the present feature unit 099IW, the second control means changes the internal date and time information every time the information regarding the change of the date and time is input (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-40, the second control means receives the information. Immediately set the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day signal). Therefore, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the present feature unit 099IW, when the second control means inputs the information regarding the change of the date and time multiple times before the lapse of the specific period, the second control means sets the date and time based on the information regarding the change of the date and time lastly input. Store the change history (for example, if an hour signal, a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, or a day signal is further received before 500 ms elapses, the change history is stored based on the last received signal. The log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the set real-time clock 012IW126). Therefore, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the second control means can display the date and time change history (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-46 (E), the current time is set on the maintenance history screen. Display the log information to the effect that it was lost). Further, according to the changed date and time, the date and time change history is stored and displayed (for example, the date and time information is read from the set real-time clock 012IW126 and the log information is recorded as the time set date and time). Therefore, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the present feature unit 099IW, the second control means stores the history information according to the order in which the abnormalities related to the game occur regardless of the change of the date and time (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-46 (E)). , Even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information was generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information was generated). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store the history information of the abnormality.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to give a profit to the player based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball wins in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). (For example, control to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game). Further, the specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved). Then, when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific information (for example, the log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. .. Therefore, information can be suitably stored. That is, troubles other than errors can be recorded, and information can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, it is possible to give a profit related to the production or a profit related to the content (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-54, the log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" and "point grant failure". ”Log information 012IW109b is recorded). Therefore, information can be suitably stored.

In this example, regarding profit, when V prize is not established and probability change is not established, when setting suggestion is unsuccessful, or when point grant is unsuccessful, log information is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to perform a character game that shifts to a big hit game based on a game ball winning in a specific area (V winning area) in the character, the game ball wins in the V prize area. If not, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, when the setting value suggestion effect is executed but a low setting value is suggested, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the display of an image having a low appearance frequency or the output of sound is expected to be displayed or not output. Further, for example, when applied to a slot machine, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the push order is incorrect while the push order navigation is being executed. As such, various aspects of "profit" can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, the specific information can be recognizablely displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (C), the information on the probable / unsuccessful tool can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. , As shown in FIGS. 8-54, the log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" and the log information 012IW109b of "point grant failure" are displayed on the maintenance history screen). Therefore, the information can be suitably displayed.

In this example, the case where the log information of the probability change failure date and time, the setting suggestion failure, and the point grant failure is displayed on the maintenance history screen is shown, but it may be configured not to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, these log information may be stored in the second log area for recording the log information for the gaming machine maker instead of the first log area for recording the log information for the gaming store. Then, the gaming machine maker may confirm what kind of trouble has occurred and configure it so that it can be used for the development of gaming machines and the like.

Further, according to the feature unit 099IW, information including specific information can be output as a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code including log information of a probability change failure date and time is generated and displayed). Therefore, information can be suitably output.

In this example, the case where the log information is recorded in association with the date and time information including both the date and the time is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the log information may be recorded in association with the date information including only the year, month, and day, or the log information may be recorded in association with the time information including only the hour, minute, and second. May be good. As such, various modes can be considered as a method of recording log information. Similarly, in the feature unit 099IW, the "date and time" is not necessarily limited to the case where both the date information and the time information are included, but also includes the case where only the date information is included, and also includes only the time information. It is a concept that includes cases.

Further, the feature unit 099IW includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. Further, it is described that the RAM area other than the set value storage means is cleared in the setting change process. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, the gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means was operated when the power supply to the gaming machine was started, and
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing a set value, a process execution means (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by having (a part for executing S034 and S048) is described, and according to this feature, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set as one of the setting values. Processing can be preferably performed in a game machine configured to be configurable. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, the RAM clear flag is confirmed, and the process is executed. It can be performed.

In this example, as a process to be executed "using specific information multiple times", a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 012IWS026, S207 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS025. Control whether or not to execute the process of changing the set value of steps 012IWS035 to S042 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS034, or clear the RAM in step 012IWS048. Although the case where the recovery process of step 012IWS049 and S051 or the RAM clear 1 process is executed depending on whether or not the flag is set is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be possible to control whether or not the operation switch is enabled immediately before the operation of changing the set value according to whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change process (for example, the part that executes steps 012IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100).
It is described that the operation means may be combined with the operation means, so that the increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used in combination as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for performing the operation for changing the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost. can.

In this example, by using the clear switch in combination, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, so the clear switch must be turned on first when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The RAM clear flag is set when it is detected, and after that, whether or not the clear switch for initializing the RAM 102 has been operated is checked to see if the RAM clear flag is set, and the set value is set. The operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be appropriately performed by checking the state of the clear switch itself.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
While the normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A portion for executing steps 012IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100, which executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and the like.
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality is provided.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A determination means (for example, a portion for executing step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of determining that the operation means has been operated based on the state of the operation means being switched from the off state to the on state is provided.
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has the game control microcomputer 100 in step 012IWS041). When Y, step 012IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). Executes step 012IWS037 when N in step 012IWS036)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs is provided.
The process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times from the start of the power supply to the gaming machine to the execution of the timer interrupt process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. Step 012IWS025, S034, S048 is executed)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS047, S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode by executing steps 012IWS514, S709, S906).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Further, the feature unit 099IW includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that if the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, the gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
Operating means (for example, clear switch) and
A processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a setting value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Steps 012IWS039 to S042 in 100) and
Based on the fact that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determining means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) Prepare,
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step. When it is Y in 012IWS041, step 012IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , When N in step 012IWS036, step 012IWS037 is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, processing is suitably performed in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being unintentionally changed even though the operating means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started is provided.
The process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times when executing a plurality of processes including the set value change process (for example, step 012IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part to do)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
While the normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A portion for executing steps 012IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100, which executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and the like.
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality is provided.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The first state storage means (for example, the previous clear switch buffer) that stores the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the operation means this time is provided.
The determination means can determine that the operation means has been operated based on the fact that the storage content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the storage content of the second state storage means is in the on state (). For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS041).
The first state storage means stores an on state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS047, S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode by executing steps 012IWS514, S709, S906).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Further, the present feature unit 099IW includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is a portion that executes steps 012IWS512, S707, S904).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is provided.
The suggestion staging determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Steps 012IWS510, S705, S902 are executed based on the stored setting values),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the second effect control). CPU012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, S904 based on the set value "1").
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity.

In addition, in this feature part 099IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. be.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), 8-29 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestion staging performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the fourth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member that can regulate the operation of the operation unit (for example, curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C).
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is N, in step 012IWS513. When N in S708 and N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), 8-29 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestion staging performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member that can regulate the operation of the operation unit (for example, curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C).
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect cannot be executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, S906, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is provided.
The suggestion staging determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Steps 012IWS510, S705, S902 are executed based on the stored setting values),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table. Step 012 IWS514, S709, S906 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), 8-29 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestion staging performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 8-31 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the sixth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member that can regulate the operation of the operation unit (for example, curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C).
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

It should be noted that the feature unit 099IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the effect mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not input normally, The suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the configuration of the fourth invention described above), and if it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If not, the case where the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executably configured as the suggestion effect (the configuration of the above-mentioned sixth invention) is shown. Not limited. For example, the control method of the above-mentioned fourth invention to the sixth invention may be used to switch whether to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state and the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. Configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the gaming state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not input normally, the configuration is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the above-mentioned fifth invention). If the game state is a probable change state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the sixth invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion staging executably by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention shown above, and the suggestion staging is executably configured by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 099IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting value command may be received, but the suggestion effect may be restricted when the received setting value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the staging control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. When the set value indicated by the set value command received in the above and the set value stored in the previous time do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control method of the above 4th to 6th inventions. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered setting value such as the set value "1" or "3", a series of villas (a continuous big hit occurs during a probable change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even numbered setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the susceptibility to the consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fourth invention to the sixth invention described above. It may be configured to (restrict the suggestion effect).

The feature unit 099IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to perform (or initial roll-out effect, etc.) is described. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying identification information for directing (for example, a decorative pattern).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and such a configuration can enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 8). -26 As shown in (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), 8-29 (A), (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (Fig. 8-9 (A),). B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). The suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the advance notice effect has been executed, etc. (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). A), (B))
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestive staging executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine characterized by further including a notification means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect is described, and this feature describes the game machine. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestion staging performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect has been executed (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) regarding the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an image pickup device, and an image generation means.
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to be recognized by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Further provided with limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 8-31. (D))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 8-31 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 012IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the staging))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player may be executed, which may reduce the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is equipped with a setting suggestion execution means that can execute a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A game machine that is characterized by being further equipped with a character effect that makes it difficult to produce, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 012IW101), and according to such a configuration. , The effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 012IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion staging of the first staging mode. See FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 8-31 (Fig. 8-31). A), (see (B)) and can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
It is equipped with a setting suggestion setting means that can set the execution ratio of the setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operation means such as the push button 31B and the operation means (management) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating (only the person can operate).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) to which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, the predetermined notification means may be executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the twelfth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-8 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 8-8 (A), (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means enables a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) to be executed regardless of a set value in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 8-8 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature unit 099IW also includes the thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may differ depending on the set value set, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In this feature unit 099IW, the case where the set value can be set in three stages of the set value "1" to "3" is shown, but the setting is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more stages are set. It may be configured to be configurable to a value, or it may be configured to be configurable to a two-step setting value. In this case, for example, the setting value can be set to 6 levels, the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the expectation degree for the big hit (reliability) when the setting value is "6". It may be configured to have the highest reliability).

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for staging control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Power supply means and
A first control means that receives power from the power supply means and controls the power supply means.
A second control means that receives power from the power supply means and stores predetermined information regarding activation based on the instruction information from the first control means.
A monitoring means for monitoring the power supply supplied to the second control means and outputting a predetermined signal to the second control means when the power supply voltage of the power supply is less than a predetermined value is provided.
The second control means is
At startup, different startup processes are executed depending on whether or not the predetermined signal is output from the monitoring means.
Initialization control is not started when the predetermined signal is output from the monitoring means at startup , initialization control is started after the output of the predetermined signal is stopped , and instruction information from the first control means is started. Based on this, the predetermined information is stored and
Specific information that can identify that only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means has restarted when the predetermined signal is not output from the monitoring means at the time of activation. Remember
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images